JP2013208411A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technology for preventing the impairment of the amusement of a play even if a frequency of a pseudo continuous variation is suggested.SOLUTION: If a special variation pattern is selected when a variable display performance with performance symbols is executed, the variable display performance is executed with the performance symbols in a special variable display performance pattern in a mode showing in a pseudo manner that the variable display and the stopping display of special symbols are executed a plurality of times within a variation period, and a pseudo continuous variation frequency appearing performance of a content suggesting the frequency smaller than or equivalent to an original frequency of a pseudo continuous variation to execute the pseudo variable display and the stopping display a plurality of times is executed over a prescribed period after the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Then, a correlation between a time necessary for the pseudo variable display and the stopping display in each round executed before the suggested frequency suggested in the pseudo continuous variation time appearing performance and the time necessary for the pseudo variable display and the stopping display in each round executed after the suggested frequency is adjusted.

Description

  In the present invention, after a special design related to internal lottery is displayed once during a change, the effect design is displayed once again, and then the effect design is displayed variably again, so that continuous notice over multiple changes is performed. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that produces an effect that makes it appear as if it is.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there is known a prior art for informing a player of pseudo continuous continuation information such as how many times the pseudo continuous variation effect is performed after the next time (see, for example, Patent Document 1). . This prior art is to display and notify the pseudo-cooperation group information during the step-up notice effect of the liquid crystal display effect.

  Also, the number of times that the player is suggested the number of times to be performed by performing in advance the effect corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous variation effect is continuously performed at the start of the pseudo continuous variation effect, and then the number of times that the pseudo continuous variation effect is suggested Prior art to perform is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 2). This prior art has suggested the background color displayed on the display screen by a color corresponding to the number of pseudo-reams.

  According to the above-described prior art, the game interest is shown by notifying the player of the expectation level for the big hit by executing the pseudo-variable effect, and notifying the number of times the pseudo-variable effect is performed in advance. It is thought that it can raise.

JP 2011-183191 A JP 2011-206305 A

  However, since the pseudo continuous variation effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the normal one-time fluctuation is performed a plurality of times, the time required for the effect is a plurality of times required for the normal one-time fluctuation. The number of times multiplied. For example, as the number of taught pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases, the time required for the pseudo-continuous fluctuation production becomes longer. Therefore, since it is necessary to wait for a long time until the end of the pseudo continuous variation effect at the stage where the number of pseudo continuous variations is taught, there is a problem that the interest in the game tends to decrease.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for preventing a decrease in interest in a game even if the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is taught.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems.
Solution 1: The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery element acquisition unit that acquires a lottery element necessary for an internal lottery related to a player's profit when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs during the game, and the lottery element acquisition unit. The lottery element storage means for storing the acquired lottery elements in the order in which the lottery elements are acquired up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the lottery elements stored by the lottery element storage means when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied When the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery executing means and the internal lottery executing means, the result of the internal lottery is displayed after variably displaying the special symbol over a predetermined fluctuation time. A special symbol display means for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a manner to represent, and a special symbol fluctuation table within the fluctuation time when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed by the special symbol display means. In response to the above, after executing a variation display effect that variably displays a plurality of effect symbols that are combined with each other, all of the plurality of effect symbols are associated with a stop display mode of the special symbol by the special symbol display means. A normal variation pattern and a special variation pattern with respect to the length of the variation time in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display unit, and a symbol effect execution unit that executes a result display effect in a combined state in a stopped display state A variation pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of types of variation patterns including the pattern, and when executing the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display means, among the plurality of types of the variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means Variation pattern selection means for selecting one of the above, and the variation display by the symbol effect execution means When the normal variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selection means at the time of execution, the normal variation display effect in a mode indicating that the special symbol variation display and stop display are performed once within the variation time. If the special effect pattern is controlled by the pattern effect executing means to execute the change display effect of the effect symbol by the pattern, and the special change pattern is selected by the change pattern selection means, the change of the special symbol is performed a plurality of times within the change time. The variable display effect pattern control means for performing control for causing the symbol effect execution means to execute the variable display effect of the effect symbol in a special variable display effect pattern in a manner that artificially represents that display and stop display have been performed, When the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selection unit, the special symbol variation table by the special symbol display unit Teaching the number of times less than or equal to the original number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, which will be performed for a plurality of times during the predetermined time from the start of display When the special variation pattern is selected by the pseudo continuous variation frequency appearance effect execution means for executing the pseudo continuous variation frequency appearance effect of the content to be performed, and the variation pattern selection means, the execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution means At the time, the time required before the pseudo variation display and stop display each time before the teaching number taught in the pseudo continuous variation number appearance effect and the pseudo time each time after the teaching number are performed. The pseudo variation display and stop table for the number of teachings are adjusted by adjusting the relative relationship with the required time required for the change display and stop display. The total time required to complete the a game machine, characterized in that it comprises a pseudo continuous variable time setting means for setting shorter than the time using the after duration of the teachings number of times.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, games and necessary operations are performed along the following flow.
(1) When a lottery trigger occurs during a game (a winning at the left start winning opening, a winning at the right starting winning opening), a lottery element (big hit) necessary for the internal lottery related to the player's profit (Decision random number) is acquired. In order to execute the internal lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a precondition. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal of generating a prize at the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening that becomes the lottery opportunity. A lottery opportunity occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly), and when a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time. Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element, a variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determining random number) for determining which one to select from among a plurality of defined variation patterns is acquired. The variation pattern determination element is an element that determines the variation display mode of the special symbol. Here, the acquired lottery elements (and variation pattern determining elements) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four for each special symbol corresponding to each start winning award) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit. (The lottery element and the variation pattern determining element may be stored in the same storage area or may be stored in different storage areas, but are stored in association with each other.)

(2) A lottery element is acquired according to (1) above, and a start condition for starting the change display of the special symbol (for example, when the special symbol is not changing and the previous change has been made, the special symbol is stopped. Is satisfied, the stored lottery elements are consumed in the stored order, and an internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(3) When the internal lottery is executed according to (2) above, the special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (variation time and stop display time) from when the special symbol's variable display is started to when it is stopped. Once the special symbol's variable display is started, the stop display is displayed. The next lottery will not be held until is completed.

(4) The change display effect (scroll display effect of the effect symbol) is executed within the change time of the special symbol (3) above, and the stop display effect (stop of the effect symbol) within the stop display time of (3) above. Display effect) is executed.

(5) Regarding the variation pattern related to the variation time of the special symbol according to (3) above, a plurality of variation patterns are defined in advance. The fluctuation patterns include normal fluctuation patterns (non-reach deviation fluctuation patterns, deviation fluctuation patterns after reach, fluctuation patterns after reach, etc.) and special fluctuation patterns (shift fluctuation patterns after reach with special effects, fluctuations after reach with special effects) Various variation patterns such as a pattern) are included.

(6) When the internal lottery is executed according to (2) above, any variation pattern is selected from the plurality of variation patterns of (5) above based on the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the consumed lottery element. It is determined selectively.

(7) When the normal variation pattern is selected according to (6) above, the normal variation display effect pattern in the form representing that the special symbol variation display and stop display are performed once within the variation time. When the effect is executed (the effect symbol variation display effect and the stop display effect are performed once) and the special variation pattern is selected, the special symbol variation display and The effect of the effect symbol is executed with the special variation display effect pattern in a mode indicating that the stop display (temporary stop display) is performed. Here, the effect by the change display and stop display of the special symbol that is performed a plurality of times is a quasi-continuous variation effect that is performed a plurality of times (hereinafter referred to as the quasi-continuous variation number), and one quasi-continuous variation effect is a single effect. It is assumed that the symbol variation display effect and the temporary stop display effect. For example, the following effects are executed in order, and an effect that simulates the fact that the change display and the stop display of the special symbol are performed a plurality of times with one change (during the change time) is performed.
(A) First, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation display effect (scroll variation effect) in which all the effect symbols (for example, the left, middle, and right effect symbols) start to move in conjunction therewith is started.
(B) Next, a stop display effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop in order is performed.
(C) Thereafter, the medium effect symbol is stopped, and the temporary stop display effect is performed with special outcomes for all the effect symbols. For example, the temporary stop display effect is performed with an order such as “1”-“2”-“3” or a special appearance such as “7”-“8”-“8”. It should be noted that the medium effect symbol may change to a special effect symbol such as a re-variable symbol immediately before this, and a squealing effect may be performed.
(D) After that, an effect that teaches that the pseudo-variable effect has been confirmed is performed. For example, an effect is displayed in which characters such as “one more time” and “Next” are displayed. That is, it represents that the first pseudo-variable effect has been completed and the second pseudo-variable effect has been finalized.
(E) Then, a variation display effect (scroll variation effect) in which all effect symbols (left, middle, and right effect symbols) start moving again is started. That is, the second pseudo-variable effect is started.
(F) Thereafter, the above (b) to (d) are repeated, and the third pseudo-continuous variation effect is started.
(G) Thereafter, after the left effect design and the right effect design stop in order, the pseudo continuous variation effect is finished (that is, the next pseudo continuous variation effect is not started), and when the reach state is reached, the reach effect is started. The
(H) The reach effect is ended, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery, and the stop display effect by the effect symbol is performed. For example, the player stops at an outcome of “7”-“7”-“7”.

(8) When the special variation pattern is selected in the above (6), the above (3) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 or 3 seconds) after the special symbol variation display in (3) is started. The effect of appearing the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation of the content teaching the number of times less than or equal to the number of times of pseudo-variable variation according to 7) (hereinafter referred to as the teaching number) is executed. For example, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 3, an effect in which a display written as “× 3” appears in the “o” circle (an effect with 3 teaching times), or “× 2” An effect in which the indicated display appears (an effect with two teachings) is executed.

(9) Also, when the special variation pattern is selected in (6) above, the variation display effect of the effect symbol that will be performed at each number of times of the pseudo continuous variation effect performed in (7) above and The time required for the stop display effect is adjusted for different set times before and after the number of teachings taught in (8) above. For example, the time required for the pseudo continuous variation effect of this time is set to be shorter than the required time when assuming that one time of the pseudo continuous variation effect performed after the teaching number is executed for the teaching number of times. Adjustments have been made. For example, when the number of teachings is 3, (f) from the start of the third pseudo-variable effect described in (7) to (g) until the pseudo-variable effect ends (until the reach effect is started). Is set to about 15 seconds, and the time for performing the special pseudo-continuous variation effect 3 times of the present invention is adjusted to be shorter than the time (45 seconds) assuming that the 15 seconds are performed 3 times. That is, (a) the time required from the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation effect to the end of (g) the third pseudo-continuous variation effect (until the reach effect is started) is the time required for 15 seconds (three times) 45 seconds). Specifically, the time required for the first and second pseudo continuous variation effects is set to 3 seconds, respectively.

  In this way, when a special variation pattern in which a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed is selected, an effect that teaches the number of times of teaching such as how many times the pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed at the start of the variation display of the special symbol is first performed It is possible to immediately end the pseudo continuous variation effect performed up to the teaching number of times, and to shorten the time to reach the pseudo continuous variation effect performed at the teaching number of times. Therefore, in the normal pseudo continuous variation effect that does not quickly reach the taught number of pseudo continuous variation effects, the time required for the pseudo continuous variation effect to be performed every time is the same, and it takes a long time until all the pseudo continuous variation effects are completed. There is a problem that it is necessary to wait for a time and the interest in the game is likely to decrease, but in the special pseudo-variable effect of the present invention, the pseudo-variable effect performed at the number of teaching times is reached earlier than usual. Therefore, a game that is smoother than usual is possible, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the present invention, in Solution 1, when the lottery element is newly stored by the lottery element storage means, the new lottery element is displayed before the predetermined execution condition is satisfied. When the lottery result destination determination means for determining in advance the result of the internal lottery in advance and the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the new lottery element are determined in advance by the lottery result destination determination means, Fluctuation pattern destination determination means for determining in advance which variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern definition means, and the newly stored data by the internal lottery execution means. Using a specific period until the lottery element is consumed, a hold display effect of the content indicating that the newly stored lottery element is stored is executed. A special lottery element is newly stored by the holding display effect execution means and the storage means, and the special variation pattern is determined by the previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determination means for the newly stored special lottery element. If the determination is made, the content and relevance of the effect scheduled to be executed by the pseudo-variable frequency appearance effect executing means within the specific period during which the hold display is being executed by the hold display effect executing means. The special hold display effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special hold display effect execution content, and when the special hold display effect execution determining means determines to execute the special hold display effect. Special hold display effect execution control means for controlling the display effect execution means to execute the special hold display effect as the hold display effect. A game machine, characterized in that to obtain.

By this solution, the following flow is realized in addition to the above (1) to (9).
(10) When a lottery element is newly stored in the above (1), at least the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance using the new lottery element before the start condition is satisfied. Thereby, before the new lottery element is actually consumed, the result of the internal lottery (whether it is a win or not) is determined.

(11) When the internal lottery determination in (10) is performed, the variation pattern according to (6) corresponding to the variation for which the preliminary determination is performed is also determined in advance. As a result, the result of the variation pattern (whether it is a special variation pattern or a normal variation pattern) is also determined based on the variation pattern determination element corresponding to the new lottery element.

(12) When a lottery element is newly stored in the above (1) and the internal lottery that consumes the corresponding lottery element is not immediately executed, a pending display effect of content indicating that the lottery element is stored is It will be executed until the internal lottery is executed and consumed. For example, a hold display effect in which a marker or the like is displayed in the vicinity where the effect symbol variable display effect is performed is executed. In addition, as a marker display pattern (type), a hold display effect is displayed in which a marker having a content representing the result of the previous determination in (10) or the result of the previous determination in (11) is displayed.

(13) If the result of the previous determination in (11) reveals that it corresponds to the special variation pattern, the effect related to the effect executed in (8) is executed in (12) above. Whether to apply to the hold display effect is determined (whether the special hold display effect is executed). Specifically, the content related to the pseudo-continuous variation count appearance effect executed in (8) above, that is, the special pseudo-variable variation effect is performed and the special teaching content is used to teach the pseudo-variable variation count. It is determined whether to execute the hold display effect. In the special hold display effect, for example, it is considered that the special variation pattern is selected as a result of (11) above, and when the number of pseudo continuous variations is 3, “× 3” is included in the “○” circle. An effect such that a marker written as “X” or a marker written as “× 2” is displayed is executed.

(14) When it is determined that the special hold display effect is executed according to (13), a special hold display effect different from the normal is executed according to (12). This special hold display effect is not executed from the time when the lottery element is stored and the marker display appears, but is executed until the corresponding lottery element is consumed (starts changing). It becomes. On the other hand, if it is not determined to execute the special hold display effect according to (13) above, the special hold display effect may not be executed until the corresponding lottery element is consumed (change starts). Yes (sometimes executed)

  In this way, when the lottery elements are stored, it is determined in advance that the internal lottery and the variation pattern are selected in advance, and the special variation pattern in which a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed at that time is selected. If it is, it is determined whether or not to execute a special on-hold display effect having a relevance to the pseudo-variable frequency appearance effect. Therefore, it is possible to teach the player the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations at the time when the lottery element is stored, not when the corresponding lottery element is consumed (variation is started). Can be prevented.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present invention causes the special hold display effect to be executed from the start within the specific period when the special hold display effect is executed by the hold display effect executing means in the solution means 2. If the determination to execute the special hold display effect from the start is not made by the specific period start time effect determining means and the specific period start time effect determining means, the start time within the specific period Content that is not related to the content of the effect scheduled to be executed by the pseudo-continuous variation number appearance effect executing means or content that is taught less than the number of times the effect executed by the pseudo-variable frequency appearance effect executing means is taught Special hold display effect execution control means for controlling the special hold display effect to be executed by the special hold display effect execution means as the hold display effect. The special hold display effect execution control means is configured to execute the special hold display effect from the start within the specific period when the specific hold start effect determination means determines to execute the special hold display effect from the start time. It is a gaming machine characterized by performing a control for causing the special hold display effect executing means to execute a display effect.

By this solution, the following flow is realized in addition to the above (1) to (14).
(15) The time point at which the marker display (hold display) appears when it is determined according to (13) that the special hold display effect of the content related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation number appearance effect executed in (8) is executed. To determine whether or not to execute the special hold display effect.

(16) When it is determined in (15) that the special hold display effect is not executed from the time when the marker appears, at the time when the marker appears, a marker for which the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is not displayed is displayed. A special on-hold display effect is displayed in which a marker on which the number of times less than the number taught in the continuous fluctuation frequency appearance effect is displayed is displayed.

  In this way, at the stage where the marker appears, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations that are actually performed is taught to be different, so that when the lottery element is consumed (a special pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is started), Since the number of consecutive fluctuations is taught, when the lottery element is consumed, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that, in the solution 3, when the special hold display effect execution control unit performs control to execute the special hold display effect, the hold display occurs when a predetermined trigger occurs. Special hold display effect change determining means for determining at least once whether to change from the special hold display effect to the special hold display effect within the specific period during which the hold display effect is being executed by the effect executing means; When the special hold display effect changing means determines to change to the special hold display effect, the special hold display effect executing means changes the effect to change to the special hold display effect at a predetermined time within the specific period. A gaming machine further comprising special hold display effect change control means for performing control to be executed.

By this solution, the following flow is realized in addition to the above (1) to (16).
(17) When the special hold display effect is executed according to (16) above, the special hold display effect is changed to the special hold display effect every time a predetermined trigger occurs until the corresponding lottery element is consumed. It is determined whether or not to do so. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to change from a marker in which the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is not displayed to a marker in which the number of times taught in the pseudo continuous fluctuation number appearance effect is described.

(18) When it is determined by (17) that the special hold display effect is changed to the special hold display effect, the special hold display effect is started from a predetermined time until the corresponding lottery element is consumed. The Rukoto.

  In this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the number of pseudo-variable changes may be different from the stage at which the marker appears, so that the interest in the game is further reduced until the lottery element is consumed Can be prevented.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine according to the present invention provides the game machine according to any one of the solutions 1 to 4, wherein the variation effect selected by the variation pattern selection unit satisfies the predetermined reach occurrence condition, the variation by the symbol effect execution unit. The reach effect is started by the reach effect executing means after the reach effect executing means for executing the reach effect during execution of the display effect and the effect effect executing means of the pseudo continuous variable number of times. A pseudo-continuous variation count display effect executing means for executing a pseudo-continuous variation count display effect with a content that teaches the same number of times as the teaching count taught in the pseudo-continuous variation count appearance effect. It is a featured gaming machine.

By this solution, the following flow is realized in addition to the above (1) to (18).
(19) When the change pattern of (6) is determined, if the reach generation condition is satisfied, the reach effect is executed separately from the change display effect by the effect symbol.

(20) When the special pseudo continuous variation effect according to (9) is performed, from the start of the first pseudo continuous variation effect until the teaching number of pseudo continuous variation effects ends and the reach effect starts. An effect in which the number of teachings is displayed is performed, or an effect in which the number of pseudo-variable effects currently being performed is displayed. Specifically, if the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 3, and the number of teachings when the lottery element is consumed is 3, the display “x3” appears from the start of the fluctuation until the reach effect. If the number of teachings when the lottery element is consumed is 2 times, the display of “× 2” appears from the start of the variation until the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation effect. An effect is performed, and an effect is displayed in which a display labeled “× 3” appears from the third pseudo-variable effect to the reach effect.

  In this way, when a special pseudo-variable effect is executed, it is possible to teach how many times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed until the reach effect, so that the player can feel secure. If the number of teachings increases along the way, a sense of expectation for the big hit can be given, the range of the effects of the gaming machine can be widened, and the decline in interest can be stopped.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, even if the number of pseudo-continuous changes is taught, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board about several places. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the special effect setting time table at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special effect setting time table at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production image matched with the change display and stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation fluctuation variation effect, reach effect, and stop display effect by an effect design (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation fluctuation variation effect, reach effect, and stop display effect by an effect design (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation fluctuation variation effect, reach effect, and stop display effect by an effect design (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the normal pseudo | simulation fluctuation variation effect, reach effect, and stop display effect by an effect design (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows example 1 of the special pseudo-continuous variation production by production design (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows example 1 of the special pseudo-continuous change production by production design (2/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 1 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by an effect design (3/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 1 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (4/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 1 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (5/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 2 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows example 2 of the special quasi-continuous variation production by production design (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows example 3 of the special pseudo-continuous change production by production design (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows example 3 of the special quasi-continuous change production by production design (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows example 4 of the special pseudo-continuous variation production by production design (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 4 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 4 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows example 4 of the special quasi-continuous change production by production design (4/4). It is a continuation figure which shows example 5 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous variation effect by effect design. It is a continuous figure which shows the example 6 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example 6 of the special pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation effect by effect design (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory number increase production | presentation selection process at the time of a normal production. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory number increase effect selection process at the time of a special effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the action memory increase production content selection table at the time of special production. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory number reduction effect selection process at the time of a normal effect. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the operation | movement memory | storage number reduction effect selection process at the time of a special effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a special action memory consumption production content setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern selection table for normal production at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the special effect pattern schedule setting table at the time of a loss. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the variation production pattern containing a normal pseudo continuous variation production, and the variation production pattern containing a special pseudo continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation production | presentation pattern selection table for normal presentation at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special performance pattern schedule setting table at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display content setting table in the upper left part in the display screen at the time of a special effect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (benefits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game is, for example, a game acquired by the player. The game value can be converted based on the number of balls. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as a ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board 8 as a game unit. The game board 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. For example, the glass unit is a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Further, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower tray ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. In the game area 8a, a left start winning port 26, a start gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 25, a variable start winning device 28, a variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed around the effect unit 40. . Among these, the left start winning opening 6 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20 is located near the upper part in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning openings 22 are located on the left side of the game area 8a and on the lower side thereof. Another remaining normal winning opening 25 is located on the right side of the game area 8a, and is located below the starting gate 20, and a variable starting winning device 28 is disposed directly below. The variable winning device 30 is located on the lower side of the right side of the game area 8a, and is arranged side by side to the right of the left start winning port 26.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the left start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22 and 25 (wins), or at the time of operation. Or a variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation is won (winned). Note that the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8a may mainly enter (win) the left start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22 (win). The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the normal winning opening 25 (win), or at the time of the variable start winning device 28 or the opening operation. There is a possibility of winning (winning) a ball in the variable winning device 30. The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but enter (win) the left start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30. The game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board 8).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the ball into the right start winning opening 28a (winning) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28b, and these opening / closing members 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28b are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the ball into the right start winning opening 28a (winning) ( (There is no gap through which game balls can flow). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right open / close members 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right start winning opening 28a is opened by expanding the opening width to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where game balls can flow in, and can generate a winning (winning) to the right start winning opening 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning port 28a at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning port 28a) at the time of the opening operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  The variable winning device 30 operates when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for the specified stop display time in a mode other than non-winning) and enters the big winning opening 30b. Enables a ball (winning) (special electric accessory). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a also reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the big winning opening 30b (the big winning opening 30b is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening 30b (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible, that is, in an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball, and an event (lottery opportunity) of winning a prize to the big winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of game balls to the special winning opening 30b. Similarly, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 basically does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b during operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board 8. In addition, game balls including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 25, the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) have been driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. A first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

  Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). The display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Further, the special symbol display device 34 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means). Since one special symbol is used in this embodiment, it is sufficient to provide one 7-segment LED as the special symbol display device 34. However, as shown in FIG. By mounting, the same hardware configuration (integrated display substrate 89) can be applied to other models using two special symbols. In the present embodiment, the working memory lamp and the working memory number display device corresponding to the special symbol are not provided. One special symbol may be displayed by two 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  The game state display device 38 includes four LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are attached to the game board 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m enhance the decorativeness of the game board 8 by their three-dimensional modeling, and perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). be able to. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. As described above, the game board 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start gate 20. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is released from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the middle start gate 20 directly below it (however, it does not always pass). .)

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board 8 is also provided with a left start winning port switch 80, a right start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the left start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. . Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the left start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof as described above. Similarly, the game board 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22 and 25. Here, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 25 is described as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball is detected for the normal winning holes 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and a winning ball switch 86 on the right side detects a winning of the game ball for the normal winning hole 25 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. , Wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals are provided.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed on the game board 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  Although not specifically illustrated, the game board 8 is also provided with a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor. Among these sensors, the magnetic sensor detects the magnetic flux flying to the game board 8 at the installation position, and the density ( A detection signal corresponding to the magnetic intensity is output. The vibration sensor detects an acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. The detection signals of these magnetic sensors and vibration sensors are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, for example.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 126 can be of a type that is faster (high clock frequency) than the main control CPU 72 and has a wide data bus width (for example, 64 bits). The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134, and various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board surface. Processing is performed to cause the lamp 53 to emit light or to actually output sound effects, voices, or the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. , 48, 50, 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. In addition, the above-described effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136, and when the player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45, a contact signal (during the push operation) or a rotation angle signal ( (At the time of rotation operation) is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board 8 and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. When an LED array is used for the backlight, an LED drive board (not shown) can be installed instead of the inverter board 158. Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, and 56, and the movable body 40f as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Control is included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (for example, 24-bit color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. ) Individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, hit determination random numbers corresponding to ordinary symbols, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) are generated on the program. ing. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 75, and its update cycle is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial value of the jackpot determination random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the left starting winning port switch 80, right starting winning port switch 82, count switch 84, and winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the left start winning port switch 80, and the right starting winning port switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the left start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the left start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the left start winning port switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event occurs). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the random number counter area for variation in the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (lottery element storage means, variation Get pattern determinants). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is in operation of the time reduction function or whether it is a big hit. If the time reduction function is not in operation other than the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the time reduction function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. Also, except during the big hit, when both the working memory of the first special symbol and the working memory of the second special symbol remain, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) This is because the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency particularly during the operation of the time shortening function. In addition, while the time shortening function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 25/251 → about 249/251), and In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when not in operation → 2 .5 seconds), and the number of times of release increases (for example, increases from 1 to 2 when not in operation), so that the game ball can be fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable) As long as the change of the second special symbol is prioritized, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) unless the start winning device 28 is interrupted for a period of time until the operation is stopped. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into two steps, for example, step S36a for determining “time reduction function in operation” and step S36b for determining “big hit”.

  Step S37: When the current game management state (internal state) is other than the big hit and the time reduction function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. To do. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 11), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (the lottery element storage means, the variation pattern determination element Acquisition). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is only determined whether or not the big hit is in the previous step S45a, and the operating state of the variable time reduction function is not determined in the first embodiment in the game other than the big hit as described above. In order to change the second special symbol over the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol regardless of the operating state of the variable time shortening function except during the big hit. This is because it can be used for prefetching. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S46 in FIG. 12) (predetermined determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the left start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects the variation time (or variation pattern number) and determination information regarding the presence or absence of reach variation. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The comparative value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No). Next, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described deviation pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes big hit hour fluctuation pattern information preliminary determination processing (fluctuation pattern preliminary determination means, destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule (No Then, step S64 is executed to set a comparative value for high probability.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has not yet started the variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the start condition (first start condition, second The main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination assuming that the start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit of 15 rounds, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until 9 winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 2 times, 15 times), As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 15 times, these may be collectively referred to as “15 rounds”. In the present embodiment, not only 15 round big hits but also multiple types of 2 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. Also, for the 15 round big hit, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the special symbol fluctuation time is a normal length (for example, about 2 to 12 seconds depending on the total stored number; except for the case where the reach fluctuation is performed. ) Is shifted to a state set to a length (for example, about 1.5 seconds) in which the variation time is shortened compared to the non-time shortened state. In addition, while the time reduction function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery has a high probability (for example, low probability of about 25/251 → about 249/251). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when inactive → 2. Since it is extended to about 5 seconds), and the number of times of opening increases (for example, it increases from 1 to 2 when it is not in operation), the game ball is fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable start) The operation memory of the second special symbol is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) as long as it is not interrupted for a period of time that the winning device 28 stops operating). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above-mentioned “15 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “15 round probability variable jackpot” and (2) “15 round normal (non-probability) jackpot” are provided as a plurality of winning types (this) There may be more). In addition to “15 round big hits”, in this embodiment, for example, (3) “2 rounds probable big hits” and (4) “2 rounds normal big hits” are provided as a plurality of winning types (special winning types) (this) There may be more).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “15 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “15 round probability variation symbol”, and “15 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “15 round probability symbol”. Further, “2 round probability variation jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “2 round probability variation symbol”, and “2 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “2 round regular symbol bonus”. For this reason, in the following description, “winning type” is appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[15 round normal design]
First, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “15 round normal symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display processing described above, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution). means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 15th round. For this reason, the “15-round normal symbol” jackpot game gives the player 15 balls (prize balls) for the round. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the big hit game, there is a privilege to shift to the “variable time reduction state”. It is given to the player.

[15 round probability variation pattern]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “15-round probability variation symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 15th round. Each of these “15 round probable symbols” jackpot games will also give the player 15 balls (prize balls) for 15 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game is finished, the “variable time reduction state” is also achieved. A privilege to be transferred is given to the player.

[2-round probability variable design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “2 round probability variation” in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs (special Game execution means). However, since the 2-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, there is almost no winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game of “2 round probability variation design” is completed within a short period of time without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “2 round probability variation symbol”, for example, the “probability variation function” is activated after the jackpot game is ended, and as a result, the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” Granted to a person. Such a “two-round probability variation pattern” gives the player the impression that a “high probability state” suddenly occurs without going through a clear big hit game. Here, an example is given in which the opening time is set to an extremely short time, but even in a 2-round big hit game, for example, multiple (for example, about 9) game balls are won in one round. It is good also as setting sufficient open time which becomes possible. In this case, the player can enjoy the privilege of shifting to the “high probability state” after giving a privilege of paying out a certain amount of prize balls.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under either of the above “15-round probability variation symbol” or “2-round probability variation symbol”, the player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” after the big hit game ends. Is granted. In addition, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the winning symbol at that time corresponds to either “15 round probability variation symbol” or “2 round probability variation symbol”, the “high probability state” will be maintained even after the jackpot game ends. Is continued (resumed). On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “15 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game is over. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it falls under “15 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[2 round normal design]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “two-round normal symbol” mode in the special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term big hit gaming state occurs (special). Game execution means). However, since the 2-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, there is almost no winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the “two-round normal symbol” jackpot game is completed within a short period of time without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. In addition, when the winning type corresponds to “two round normal symbol”, neither the “probability changing function” nor the “time shortening function” is activated after the big hit game ends. As a result, if the state before the big hit is the “high probability state”, the state is shifted to the “low probability state”, and if the state before the big hit is the “low probability state”, the “low probability state” is maintained. Is done. Such a “two-round normal symbol” has the significance of terminating the “high probability state”. Here, an example is given in which the opening time is set to an extremely short time, but even in a 2-round big hit game, for example, multiple (for example, about 9) game balls are won in one round. It is good also as setting sufficient open time which becomes possible. In this case, even if the “high probability state” is completed, a certain amount of award by paying out a prize ball can be given to the player.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game executing means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (Game) is executed (in this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small winning game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins in the big winning opening as in the two-round big winning game. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached).

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next special symbol determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9). It will be. When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). Even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is shortened based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 seconds) The number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → about 2.0 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect”, “reach effect”, and “reach effect with special effect”. When winning, one of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Here, the “special effect” refers to an effect in which a special effect such as a special pseudo continuous variation effect (hereinafter referred to as a special pseudo continuous effect) and a working memory display is performed. The “reach effect” represents an effect in which the reach effect is performed after the “special effect”. Note that the “pseudo-variable effect” means that the effect symbol displayed on the display screen during the one-time variation of the special symbol is rendered once (stopped) and then simulated. The effect that the effect that the variable display is started continuously is repeated at least once. The “special effect” will be specifically described using a plurality of example effects.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the deviation variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes 14 different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “235”, “241”, “243”, “245”, for example. ”,“ 247 ”,“ 249 ”,“ 251 ”,“ 253 ”,“ 255 (FFH) ”, and“ 1 ”to“ fluctuation pattern number ”for each“ comparison value ”. 14 "is assigned.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, for variation patterns 7 and 8 (variation pattern numbers “7” and “8”), a relatively long variation time (for example, 1 minute or more) is set, and is defined as “a specific type of variation pattern”. Has been.

  In addition, the variation pattern numbers “9” to “14” correspond to the variation pattern in which the reach effect is performed after the special effect is performed, and then shifts (the shift pattern after the reach with the special effect). Here, for each of the variation patterns 9 to 14 (variation pattern numbers “9” to “14”), the total time of the time required for the special effect to be executed and the time required for the reach effect is set.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the time required for the special effect at the time of loss.
In the present embodiment, different special effects are executed in the respective variation patterns 9 to 14 in which the special effects are performed. The time required for the special effects performed when each of the variation patterns 9 to 14 is selected is set differently. This table is applied when the shift variation patterns 9 to 14 are selected after the above-mentioned reach with special effects. Specific numerical values of the time required for the special performance are as follows.

Deviation fluctuation pattern 9 after reaching with special effects: about 18 seconds after reaching special deviation fluctuation pattern 10 after reaching: deviation fluctuation pattern 11 after reaching about 33 seconds; deviation fluctuation pattern 11 after reaching about 48 seconds; deviation fluctuation pattern 12 after reaching with special effects about 12 seconds; 21 There is a special production for about 2 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern is 13 after the reach.

[Refer to Fig. 16: Variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
Therefore, the total time of the time required for the special effect and the time required for the reach effect (for example, about 60 seconds) (the numerical value of the above time + 60 seconds) is set as the change time for each of the change patterns 9-14. Here, since only one variation time is set for one variation pattern, the time required for reach production (for example, about 60 seconds) is fixed and the reach production that can be produced is limited. By classifying the shift variation pattern 9 into a plurality after the reach with the effect, for example, by setting the shift variation patterns 9a to 9e after the reach with the special effect, the change time corresponding to each is made different (for example, the above-mentioned Special production time +20 seconds, +40 seconds, +60 seconds, +80 seconds, +120 seconds) may be set.

  Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 13) (the same applies to the big hit).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number. Similarly, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value is “250”, it is sequentially compared with the comparison value, and since it is equal to or less than the comparison value “251”, the main control CPU 72 selects “12” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number. .

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are four types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The four types are “2-round normal symbol”, “2-round probability variable symbol”, “15 round normal symbol”, and “15 round probability variable symbol”. Note that each of the four types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of “15 round probability variation symbol”, “15 round probability variation symbol a”, “15 round probability variation symbol b”, “15 round probability variation symbol c”, and so on.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different in the type of winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each. That is, at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, any one of “2 round normal symbol”, “2 round probability variable symbol”, “15 round normal symbol”, and “15 round probability variable symbol” is selected.
On the other hand, at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, “15 round normal symbol” or “15 round probability variation symbol” is selected. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the objects that can be selected as the winning symbol depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “10”, “20”, “50” is set to 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. In the second column from the left, “2-round normal symbol”, “2-round probability variation symbol”, “15 round normal symbol”, and “15 round probability variation symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “2 round normal symbol” is 10/100 (= 10%), and the rate of “2 round probability variation symbol” is 100 minutes. 20 (= 20%). Further, the ratio of selecting “15 round normal symbol” is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting “15 round probability variable symbol” is 50/100 (= 50%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “2 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the current big hit result corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning symbol type with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each of the distribution values “30” and “70” is the case where the denominator is 100. It corresponds to the ratio. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “2 round normal symbol”, “2 round probability variable symbol”, “15 round normal symbol”, and “15 round probability variable symbol” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. . That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of “15 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the proportion of “15 round probability variation symbol” is selected. It is 70/100 (= 70%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%. However, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for “2-round normal symbol” and “2-round probability variation symbol” are not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Also, the EVENT values “02H” and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, and “15 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H02H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  Note that the selected winning symbols are different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not activated), so the second special symbol The working memory of is difficult to break. And if you exclude “2 round jackpots” from the winning type for the second special symbol, it will be difficult to draw “2 round jackpots” especially in the “high probability state” and “time saving state”. There is an advantage that there is little inconvenience.

  However, in this embodiment, the working memory can be increased at the same pace as the first special symbol even during the second special symbol from the normal game using the ball sorter 200, so the first special symbol as described above. You may employ | adopt the same selection ratio by both, without providing the difference in the selection ratio of a winning symbol by a symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 15 rounds big hit (15 round normal big hit or 15 rounds probable big hit), for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. . The “15-round big win winning pattern selection table” defines a variety of fluctuation patterns corresponding to “reach production” and “reach production with special production”. One of the variation patterns is selected from among them. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Note that the “reach effect with special effect” is as described above.

[Example of the variation pattern selection table when winning 15 rounds big hit]
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of winning 15 rounds.
This selection table is a table used when a 15-round big hit is won (a variation pattern defining unit, a variation time defining unit). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “31”, “55”, “80”, “105”, “130”, “155”, “170”, “195”, “220”. ”,“ 255 (FFH) ”, and“ variation pattern numbers ”“ 21 ”to“ 30 ”are assigned to the respective“ comparison values ”.

  The variation pattern numbers “21” to “30” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation patterns 25 to 30 (variation pattern numbers “25” to “30”) correspond to the variation patterns that are hit by the reach effect after the special effect is performed. Here, for each of the variation patterns 25 to 30 (variation pattern numbers “25” to “30”), a total time of a time required for a special effect to be executed and a time required for a reach effect is set.

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the time required for the special effect at the time of the big hit.
In the present embodiment, different special effects are executed in each of the fluctuation patterns 25 to 30 where the special effects are performed. The time required for the special effects performed when each of the variation patterns 25 to 30 is selected is set differently. This table is applied when the variation pattern 25-30 after the reach with the special effect is selected. Specific numerical values of the time required for the special performance are as follows.

Fluctuation pattern 25 after reach with special effects; fluctuation pattern 26 after reach with special effects for about 18 seconds; Fluctuation pattern 27 with special effects for about 33 seconds; Fluctuation pattern 27 after reach with special effects; Fluctuation pattern 29 after special reach with special effects for about 29 seconds; Fluctuation pattern 30 with special effects for about 30 seconds;

[See Figure 20: Fluctuation pattern selection table for winning 15 rounds]
Therefore, the total time of the time required for the special effect and the time required for the reach effect (for example, about 60 seconds) (the numerical value of the above time + 60 seconds) is set as the change time for each of the change patterns 25-30. Here, since only one variation time is set for one variation pattern, the time required for reach production (for example, about 60 seconds) is fixed and the reach production that can be produced is limited. By classifying the variation pattern 25 after reaching with effect into a plurality of variations, for example, by varying the variation patterns 25a to 25e with reach after special effect, the corresponding variation times can be made different (for example, the above-mentioned Special production time +20 seconds, +40 seconds, +60 seconds, +80 seconds, +120 seconds) may be set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is “50”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the next comparison value “31” because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “31”. 55 ”is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number. Similarly, if the variation pattern determination random number value is “250”, the comparison result is sequentially compared with the comparison value “255” or less, so the main control CPU 72 selects “30” as the corresponding variation pattern number. .

[See Figure 15: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the game state flag is selected regardless of whether the winning symbol type (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “2 round probability variation symbol” or “15 round probability variation symbol”. As a result, the value (01H) of the probability variation function activation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means). Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the gaming state flag when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “15 round normal symbol” or “2 round normal symbol”. (Low probability state setting means, low probability state transition means).

  In addition, the main control CPU 72 selects all the winning symbols whose types of winning symbols determined in the previous step S2410 (successful symbol number at the time of big hit) are “15 round normal symbol”, “15 round probability variable symbol”, and “2 round probability variable symbol”. The main control CPU 72 sets the time shortening function operation flag value (01H) as a game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means). However, the “two-round probability variation symbol” is limited to the case where the internal state is a high probability state (the electric chew support is added for the two-round probability variation winning in the so-called latent probability variation state).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern determination means, variation time determination means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, a variation pattern equivalent to that at the time of variation is selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 14: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 15). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 15), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 15).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 15). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is any one of “15 round probability variation symbols”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “15 rounds”. In the case of “2-round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “2 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. Note that the probability variation state display lamp 38c is switched to non-display (turned off) even if the probability variation function operation flag is set when the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number command. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the continuous operation number command is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “15 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “15 rounds (15R)”. If the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “2 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “2 rounds (2R)”.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). The opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 14). Further, the interval time between rounds is set to, for example, about 2 seconds for the “2 round symbol” and about several seconds (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds) for the “15 round symbol”. In addition, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is 9 for all winning symbols, for example, but as mentioned above, winnings occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds). Is very rare (not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 15). Specifically, if the large category “15 round symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15 times. If “2 round symbols” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to two. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“1” for 2 times, “14” for 15 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 26) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. It should be noted that since the release timer value is set for a short time for both the first hit and the second round release of the “two-round probability variation symbol” at the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has ended before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 26). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special winning opening closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 25). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (2 times or 15 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 26). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 25). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing.

Step S5505: The main control CPU 72 deletes the continuous operation number command here.
Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 15) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 10 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 15) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag (variable time reduction function operation flag) is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 determines the number of time reductions (for example, about 100 times or about 10,000 times). Set. The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5516: In any case, after the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Among these, for the left effect symbol, a symbol row is arranged in ascending order of “1” to “9”, and for the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol, the numbers are “9” to “1”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

As examples of variable display effects using specific effect designs, two examples of basic effects for each variation adopted in the present embodiment and six examples of special effects are given (total Eight examples) A description will be given with reference to the drawings.
(1) Fluctuation display effect and stop display effect that do not include a pseudo-variable effect (when out of place) (FIGS. 30 and 31)
(2) Fluctuation display effects including normal pseudo-variable effects, reach effects, and stop display effects (at the time of loss and big hit) (FIGS. 32 to 35)
(3) Fluctuation display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect (Example 1) (FIGS. 36 to 40)
(4) Fluctuation display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect (example 2) (FIGS. 41 and 42)
(5) Fluctuation display effect including special pseudo-variable effect (Example 3) (FIGS. 43 and 44)
(6) Fluctuation display effect including special pseudo-variable effect (Example 4) (FIGS. 45 to 48)
(7) Fluctuation display effect including special pseudo-variable effect (Example 5) (FIG. 49)
(8) Fluctuation display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect (example 6) (FIGS. 50 and 51)

[(1) Example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect that does not include a pseudo-continuous variable effect]
FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variation display and stop display of special symbols. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). In this variable display effect, after winning the left start winning opening 26, after the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and the stop display (including the fixed stop). Corresponds to a series of effects performed until the time. The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols.

[Before change display]
FIG. 30 (A): For example, the first special symbol represents a non-winning state by the first special symbol display device 34 (the second special symbol display device 35 may be used) because it has been lost (non-winning) in the previous internal lottery. In the case where the game is stopped and displayed, or when the game is started at the beginning of the business day in the pachinko machine 1 (so-called state in the morning after power-on). At this time, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a stop display effect (may be a result display effect) is performed in a manner representing the result of non-winning.

  The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Of these, the left effect symbol and right effect symbol are displayed in a relatively large size in the left and right areas of the display screen, respectively, while the medium effect symbol is displayed in a relatively small size in the middle area of the display screen. Has been.

  Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Note that the left, middle, and right effect symbols potentially constitute symbol sequences in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow in the vertical direction (scroll) in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen, but at the time of stop display, one effect symbol (Fig. In the example of 30, “3”-“4”-“7”) is displayed on the display screen.

  Although not shown in FIG. 30, a background image corresponding to the “outdoor stage” or “coast stage” is displayed on the display screen. The effect symbol is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but during the variable display (while scrolling), the entire effect symbol is displayed in a transparent (transparent) state, so that the visibility of the background image is improved. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the stay stage in the production.

[Operation memory display marker]
In the lower part of the display screen, an area for displaying a marker image indicating the presence of working memory is formed in a band shape. Since the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be accumulated up to 4 (upper limit number) during the game, wavy circles in the figure (reference symbols M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) In the band-like area at the bottom of the screen, four marker images are divided into left and right, and a maximum of eight can be displayed side by side. When an operation memory is generated during the game, a marker image indicating the presence is displayed in the band-like area. Among these, the maximum four marker images displayed on the left side correspond to the operation memory of the first special symbol, and the maximum four marker images displayed on the right side correspond to the operation memory of the second special symbol. It shall be. These marker images are displayed side by side in the order of storage from the center to the outside, for example, and the marker images corresponding to the newly added working memory are sequentially added and displayed on the outermost side.

[Fluctuating area]
Further, the changing area HA is formed at the center position of the band-like area at the lower part of the display screen. In the changing area HA, a marker image corresponding to the working memory consumed by the current change is displayed at a certain time. When the working memory is consumed due to the start of the next fluctuation, the marker image displayed next to the changing area HA (the head of each of the left and right columns) moves to the changing area HA, where there is a certain time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol is changed with priority over the first special symbol, when the marker images are displayed on both the left and right sides, the right marker image has priority and is changing. When the marker image is displayed on the left side only, the marker image closest to the center moves to the changing region HA. If any marker image remains on the left or right side of the belt-like region after the movement, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the center so that the marker image closest to the center is removed. In addition, when a marker image is displayed in the changing area HA and a predetermined time has elapsed, or when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing, the changing area HA is grayed out as illustrated. ing.

  In addition, fourth symbols Z1, Z2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are displayed at the upper right corner position of the display screen. These fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the three effect symbols of left, middle, and right, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the variation display of the effect symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply simple colors (for example, “□” figure) with a color, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “2 round big hit” or “15 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Memory number display effect]
In FIG. 30, (B): When a player borrows a game ball and starts a game by performing a launch operation, the game ball will eventually win the left start winning opening 26 (or right start winning opening 28a). A lottery opportunity occurs. In this example, since one winning memory corresponding to the first special symbol is generated due to the winning at the left start winning opening 26, the marker is displayed in a manner indicating an increase of one working memory in the belt-like area at the bottom of the screen. M1 is newly displayed (memory number display effect executing means). Since the operation memory generated here is consumed as it is under the control of the main control CPU 72, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit on or immediately displayed after being lit on and displayed in a manner representing one stored number. Not lit. However, on presentation, the marker M1 is displayed within a short time, so that it is possible to clearly notify the player that “new operation memory has occurred”. Note that, when the first special symbol has started the variable display under the control of the main control CPU 72, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a mode of the variable display. Here, in order to facilitate visual discrimination, the markers M1 and M2 correspond to the second special symbol, for example, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as a circle (o) in a blue display color. The marker M1 to be displayed is displayed as, for example, a red display color circle (◯). In addition, when an effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is performed, it may be displayed as a character image, or a display color may be blinked.

[Working memory consumption effect]
In FIG. 30, (C): With the consumption of the working memory, an effect of moving the marker M1 displayed on the left side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed (memory number display effect executing means). Thereby, it is possible to easily tell the player that the internal lottery has been performed by consuming one working memory for the player. Note that the marker M1 (without reference numerals) that has moved to the changing area HA is displayed in an enlarged manner, so that it is identified as so-called “hold”. At this time, the degree of expectation may be taught in advance by changing the mode of the marker M1 in the changing area HA.

[Variable display effects]
In addition, in synchronism with the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is performed by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect execution means). That is, the display of the left effect, the middle effect, and the right effect is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol. Is started. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. As already mentioned.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape of “nature outdoors in the daytime”. Such a background image is executed as the “stage effect” described above, and expresses that the stay stage on the effect is, for example, an “outdoor stage”. In this embodiment, the “outdoor stage” corresponds to a normal state in which the above-described variation time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is also deactivated. In addition, various stages, zones, and modes are provided in the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for the various stages, zones, and modes (state display production execution means). The difference between these stages, zones and modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible. Further, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed, and the fourth symbol Z1 continues to express the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 31, (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design stops changing first. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped on the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

  In addition, since one new operation memory is added due to the occurrence of a winning at the left start winning opening 26 during the change, one new marker M1 is displayed on the left side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player of the increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) (memory number display effect executing means).

  In the changing area HA, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the marker M1, the changing marker M1 is not displayed and is changed to gray-out display. Accordingly, it is possible to more clearly convey to the player that the working memory has been consumed due to the change (memory number display effect execution means).

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 31, (E): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “6” is stopped on the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the production symbol representing the number “4” stops, the production sequence that represents the number “5” stops by sliding the design row for one symbol, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “6” stops, the design symbol representing the number “5” stops by sliding the symbol sequence in the reverse direction by one symbol, and thereby the pattern that develops to reach. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “1” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “5” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.
In addition, since one more operation memory is added during this period, a marker M1 (second) indicating the presence of the added operation memory is additionally displayed on the left side of the belt-like region.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 31, (F): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “2” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “5” − “2” − “6”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 31, (G): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the first special symbol in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Be started.

  That is, with the start of the next change, the left, middle, and right effect symbols all start changing display. Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. For example, there have been two working memories so far, but the oldest (oldest) one that was displayed closest to the center in the marker M1 is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory is consumed with respect to the first special symbol even in the production.

  In the example of (G) in FIG. 31, the working memory is consumed by moving the marker M1 representing the working memory at the head (most centered) in the storage order to the changing area HA. It is expressed in the production that the remaining is one. In addition, the remaining one marker M1 displayed on the left side of the belt-like region is shifted toward the center one by one, and an effect of waiting until the next and subsequent changes is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. Yes (memory number display effect execution means).

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

  As described above, the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment has been described by taking (1) the change display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of disengagement) not including the pseudo continuous change effect as an example. Next, (2) a variation display effect including a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect and a stop display effect will be described as examples. The variation display effect including a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect is an effect in which all effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in order at predetermined time intervals, and thereafter, the variable display is started in a pseudo continuous manner.

[(2) Examples of fluctuation display effects including normal pseudo-variable effects, reach effects, and stop display effects (at the time of loss and big hit)]
32 to 35 are continuous diagrams showing examples of a normal pseudo continuous variation effect, a reach effect, and a stop display effect with effect symbols. These continuous diagrams assume a state in which all effect symbols shown in (E) in FIG. 31 continue from the state where they are temporarily stopped. That is, the state shown in (E) in FIG. 31 is not the state in which the variable display related to the first special symbol is finished (stop display state, fixed stop state), and one change related to the first special symbol is not finished. Suppose that the variable display is in a state of continuing (variable display is in progress). Therefore, the effect shown in FIG. 32 is assumed to be a continuation of a series of effects from (A) in FIG.

  32 and 33 are continuous diagrams showing a flow of a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect symbol. FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are continuous diagrams showing the flow of reach production by the production image. Here, an example of a notice effect, a reach effect (a pre-reach notice effect, a reach notice notice effect), and a stop display effect that are executed during a fluctuating display effect and performed after a normal pseudo-continuous fluctuating effect with an effect symbol. Will be explained.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
FIG. 32 (F): The medium effect symbol changes to a special effect symbol (for example, a re-variable symbol) not included in the “1” to “9” effect symbol sequence, and such a re-variable symbol is displayed on the display screen. An effect (so-called “pseudo-joint effect”) is performed as if it is descending to the center position. In this example, the female character closes her eyes with her hands together and is praying in some way, as shown in the re-variable design.

[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 32 (G): When the re-variable symbol that has been beaten up to that point stops at the center position of the display screen, pseudo-continuous determination (twice pseudo-continuous) is established. In this example, the female character shown in the re-variable symbol is shown with the eyes open and the flames are being blown up from the whole. Although the case of pseudo-continuous determination is given here, there is a pattern in which the re-variable symbol does not stop and passes to the lower part of the screen and does not develop into a pseudo-continuous.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 32 (H): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle and right effect symbols are displayed with a temporary stop appearance. In this example, a temporary stop output of “5”-“6”-“6” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “6”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

[Revariation start (pseudo-ream 2nd)]
In FIG. 33, (I): The temporarily stopped effect design starts to change again, and a full-fledged pseudo-continuous variation effect (the second pseudo-continuous effect) is performed. In the upper left part of the display screen, there is an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” (corresponding to “× 2” in the circle. The same applies hereinafter) are displayed. An appearance that appears. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly notify the player that “the second variation (pseudo continuous variation effect) has started”. The effect image by characters such as “(× 2)” is displayed until the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation effect. For example, a stop display effect (including a revariable symbol stop effect) in which all effect symbols stop, It is displayed until reach production starts.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 33 (J): After that, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the pseudo-variable effect, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 33 (K): Thereafter, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 34 (L): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

[Notice after reach occurs]
34 (M): In the display screen where the reach state has occurred, for example, a character image of “chance” is displayed at the center position for a while, and a radial flash image is displayed around the reach. A notice effect is performed. In addition, a mode in which “chance” sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 at this time may be used. By executing the notice effect after such a sensely lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Development of reach production]
In FIG. 34, (N): After that, the reach design effect is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner position of the display screen, and for example, an image of a character imitating “lantern ghost” appears on the left side and the right side thereof. The effect that the image of “female character” appears and the image of the character “VS” appears at the center position is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the battle reach effect will be started. In the upper left corner position of the display screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“7” − “being changed” − “7”).

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 34 (O): In the display screen, for example, “Lantern Haunted” has an effect of opening a mouth and taking out the technique of “biting”. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 35 (P): In the display screen, this time, a “female character” takes out a fan (weapon), and with the fan, there is an effect that accumulates enthusiasm while preparing to face “lantern ghost” .

  In FIG. 35 (Q): And in the display screen, “Lantern Haunted” finally put out a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the “female character” greets the special technique with a fan. In this state, if the “lantern ghost” wins, it will be out of place, and if the “female character” wins, it will be a big hit. Therefore, this situation is the final stage of battle reach production, and is the most exciting part as a game. For this reason, a cut-in notice or a helper appearance notice that another “female character” may help at the same time may be performed simultaneously in this scene. Alternatively, information that prompts the pressing operation of the effect switching button 45 (a character image such as “Please press the button!”) Is displayed on the display screen, and the color is changed when the effect switching button 45 is actually pressed. It is good also as performing the notice effect which represents the big hit reliability, such as a line cut-in notice.

[Result display effect (when disconnected)]
In FIG. 35 (R): In the display screen, “Land Lantern Ghost” is displayed together with a character image of “Defeat ....”, and “Woman Character” is displayed small. As a result, a result display effect representing that the current lottery result is out of place (non-winning) is performed. In the upper left corner position of the display screen, the result display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“7” − “8” − “7”).

  In FIG. 35 (S): In the display screen, the effect symbol is confirmed and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. In the example shown in the figure, it is shown that the production symbol is stopped by a combination of “7”-“8”-“7” in the numbers on the screen, and in this case, the current fluctuation is a normal “out”. Applicable things are expressed in the production. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is a flow when the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol corresponds to non-winning, but when it corresponds to winning, the performance is performed according to the following flow.

[Result display effect (at the time of hit)]
In FIG. 35 (T): In the display screen, “female character” is displayed large together with the letters “Victory!”, And “Lantern Haunted” is displayed small, which means a big win (winning). A result display effect is performed. In addition, at the upper left corner position of the display screen, the result display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("7"-"7"-"7").

  In FIG. 35 (U): Then, in the display screen, the final stop display of the effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the final stop display of the first special symbol. As in the case of the loss, the effect symbol fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In this case, the fourth symbol Z1 (not shown) is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to “15 rounds probable big hit”.

  As described above, the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment has been described by taking (2) the change display effect and the stop display effect including the normal pseudo-continuous change effect as an example. As described above, by performing the fluctuation display effect and the reach effect (battle reach effect) including the normal pseudo-continuous change effect, the player can have a great sense of expectation for the big hit. Next, (3) Example 1 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described. Here, in the variable display effect including the normal pseudo continuous variation effect, it is not known whether or not the pseudo continuous variation effect is started at the time when the variable display is started, and the first pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the production, the production symbols were stopped after a certain amount of time, so it took a certain amount of time. In the variable display effect (example 1) including the special pseudo continuous variable effect described below, it is understood that the pseudo continuous variable effect is started when the variable display is started, and the first simulation is performed. In the continuous variation effect, a transition is made to the next second pseudo continuous variation effect in a short time. Hereinafter, the variable display effect (Example 1) (FIGS. 36 to 40) including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described more specifically.

[(3) Example 1 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-variable effect]
36 to 40 are continuous diagrams showing Example 1 of a special pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol. It is assumed that the gaming state is in the “time shortening state” and that the variation display related to the second special symbol is being executed. Here, only the special pseudo-variable effect by the effect design will be described. For example, the reach effect and the like are the same as the above example (2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 36 (A): When the time shift state is entered, the night image is displayed on the background of the display screen, and the “night mode” is entered for the production. In addition, since the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency in the time reduction state, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number separately from the number of working memories corresponding to the first special symbol. It becomes easy. In this example, the number of working memories corresponding to the first special symbol has already reached the upper limit number due to the current fluctuation, and one working memory number corresponding to the second special symbol exists. .

[Stop display effect]
36 (B): Thereafter, all effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol (the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and finally the middle effect symbol stop). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “6”-“3”-“4”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of focus”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
36 (C): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, there are working memory (4) corresponding to the first special symbol and working memory (1) corresponding to the second special symbol, but since the second special symbol has priority, the special memory is special. One operation memory corresponding to the symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special working memory effect]
In FIG. 36 (D): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect symbol stops after the left effect symbol stops. In this example, the left effect symbol representing the number “2” on the screen and “5” representing the stoppage. Since a new winning at the right start winning opening 28a is newly added there, one new operation memory is added, so one new marker M2 is displayed on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. Then, an effect (special action memory effect) in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are written in the marker M2 appears. As a result, the player is instructed in an easy-to-understand manner that the operating memory different from normal has increased, and a special pseudo-variable effect related to “(× 2)” as an effect corresponding to the operating memory, That is, it can be taught that it has been determined that the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is executed twice or more.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 37 (E): Then, in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the last medium effect symbol stops and all the effect symbols stop. In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “2”-“2”-“5”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of focus”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (first time)]
FIG. 37 (F): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, there are working memory (4) corresponding to the first special symbol and working memory (1) corresponding to the second special symbol, but since the second special symbol has priority, the special memory is special. One operation memory corresponding to the symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special working memory consumption effect]
In addition, with the consumption of the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the marker M2 displayed with the characters “(× 2)” displayed on the right side of the strip-like area at the bottom of the display screen is displayed in the changing area HA. An effect to be moved is performed (stored number display effect executing means). When the marker M2 with “(× 2)” moved to the changing area HA is enlarged and displayed, the characters “(× 2)” are written in the upper left part of the display screen. An effect in which an effect image appears is performed (special operation memory consumption effect). Furthermore, the female character in the medium effect symbol is “pseudo two or more times!” Along with the effect that the medium effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the previous stop display effect ((E) in FIG. 37) is enlarged. A line production that tells you is performed (special working memory consumption production). Further, at this time, the same sound may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as “Pseudo-continuous 2 times or more!” Is displayed. By performing such a special operation memory consumption effect, it is possible to easily tell the player that “two or more pseudo continuous variation effects will be started from now on”. In addition, since the display is “(× 2)”, the dialogue by the female character displayed in the screen display may be “Pseudo two times!”. However, when the third time of two or more times is performed, the player can have a strong expectation for the big hit and attract interest in the change.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
In FIG. 37 (G): Immediately after the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (for example, after 1.5 seconds), the variation of the left effect is stopped after the left effect is stopped. In this example, a state where the left effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen and the right effect symbol representing the number “8” is immediately stopped is shown. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol represents a state in which the pseudo change effect is performed as if the symbol changes to the above-described re-variation symbol and similarly descends to the center position of the display screen.

[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 38 (H): The re-variation symbol that has been beaten until then stops at the center position of the display screen, and the quasi-continuation is confirmed (twice quasi-continuation). In this example, the female character shown in the re-variable symbol is shown with the eyes open and the flames are being blown up from the whole.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 38 (I): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stop points. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“8” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

  It should be noted that the time from the start of the second special symbol variation display ((F) in FIG. 37) to the end of the first special pseudo-continuous variation effect ((I) in FIG. 38) is about 3 seconds. Is set to As described above, for the pseudo-continuous variation effect that is to be performed twice or more, the time required for the pseudo-continuous variation effect performed in the order before the number of times taught (two times here) is very long. Is set to a short time.

[Revariation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (second time)]
In FIG. 38 (J): the temporarily stopped effect design starts to change again, and the second pseudo-change effect is performed.

[Stage progress notice effect (first stage)]
In FIG. 39 (K): Next, during the execution of the second pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect design, the stage advance notice effect (before the reach occurs) using the female character's pattern image (reference code SU1). (Notification effect) (step-up notice effect) is performed. This stage advance notice effect is a notice effect in which a change in mode progresses step by step from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this stage advance notice effect is displayed in such a manner that it suddenly appears at the corner position of the liquid crystal screen. Note that the “stage advance notice effect” here is a notice effect with content that suggests that there is a possibility that the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a winning manner according to the progress of the effect.

[Stage progress notice effect (2nd stage)]
In FIG. 39 (L): The stage advance notice effect of the second stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the first stage. In the illustrated example, another female character SU2 additionally appears from the lower right position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female character SU1 that has been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (3rd stage)]
In FIG. 39 (M): The stage advance notice effect at the third stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect at the second stage. In the illustrated example, the third female character SU3 additionally appears from the upper left position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 and SU2 that have been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (4th stage)]
In FIG. 39 (N): The stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the third stage. In the illustrated example, a fourth female character SU4 additionally appears from the upper right position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU3 displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (5th stage)]
[Left design stop]
In FIG. 40 (O): The stage advance notice effect of the fifth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage. In the example shown in the figure, the fifth female character SU5 appears as a close-up at the center position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU4 displayed previously. At this time, the left effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 40 (P): After this, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 40 (Q): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Thereafter, the reach effect described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

  In this way, the time from the start of the second special pseudo-variable effect (J in FIG. 38) to the end (Q in FIG. 40) is the first special pseudo-variable effect. It is set to a long time with respect to the time. For example, the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 3 seconds, while the second time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. In this way, the time required for the pseudo continuous variation effect performed in the order of the number of times taught (two times here) is set to a long time for the pseudo continuous variation effect to be performed twice or more, By performing a notice effect during that time, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player and improve the expectation of the reach effect to be performed thereafter.

  As described above, (1) the example 1 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described with respect to the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As described above, by performing the special action memory effect and the special action memory consumption effect, it can be taught to the player that it has been determined that the special pseudo-variable effect is executed. Furthermore, in the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect, the time from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the temporary stop was set to 15 seconds for the first time and 15 seconds for the second time. In the variable effect, the time until the effect symbol temporarily stops is set to 3 seconds for the first time and 15 seconds for the second time. In this way, by setting the order before the taught number (here, twice) to a short time, it is possible to realize a smoother game progression. Next, (4) Example 2 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described.

[(4) Example 2 of variable display effect including special pseudo-variable effect]
41 and 42 are continuous diagrams showing a second example of a special pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect symbol.
These continuous diagrams are assumed to be a continuation from the state where the left and right effect symbols shown in (P) in FIG. That is, the case where it does not develop into reach production is assumed. Here, only the special pseudo-variable effect by the effect design will be described. For example, the reach effect and the like are the same as the above example (2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
In FIG. 41 (Q): After the reach state has occurred, the medium effect symbol is changed to the above-mentioned re-variation symbol, and a pseudo-joint effect is performed as if it has come down to the center position of the display screen. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the pseudo-continuous variation effect may be performed again without developing into a reach effect.

[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 41 (R): The re-variation symbol that has been beaten until then stops at the center position of the display screen, and the quasi-continuous determination (three-time quasi-continuation) is established. In this example, the female character shown in the re-variable symbol is shown with the eyes open and the flames are being blown up from the whole. In the upper left part of the display screen, an effect of changing from “(× 2)” to an effect image in which characters “(× 3)” are written is performed. Thereby, it can be instructed to the player that it has been determined that the third time of the pseudo continuous variation effect by the effect symbol will be performed.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 41 (S): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stop points. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“7” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

  The time from the start of the second special pseudo-variable effect (J in FIG. 38) to the end (S in FIG. 41) is the first time of the special pseudo-variable effect. Is set to a long time. For example, the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 3 seconds, while the second time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. In this way, the time required for the pseudo continuous variation effect performed in the order of the number of times taught (two times here) is set to a long time for the pseudo continuous variation effect to be performed twice or more, By performing a notice effect during that time, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player and improve the expectation of the reach effect to be performed thereafter.

[Revariation start]
[Special quasi-variable production (third time)]
In FIG. 41 (T): The temporarily stopped effect symbol starts to change again, and the third pseudo-variable effect effect is performed.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 42 (U): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect design representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. In addition, before the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice effect described above may be performed to indicate that the big hit expectation is high.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 42, (V): After this, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 42 (W): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Thereafter, the reach effect described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

  In this way, the time from the start of the third special pseudo-variable effect (T in FIG. 41) to the end (W in FIG. 42) is the first special pseudo-variable effect. It is set to a long time with respect to the time. For example, the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 3 seconds, while the third time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. As described above, the pseudo continuous variation effect that is to be performed twice or more takes a long time to perform the pseudo continuous variation effect that is performed in the order of the larger value than the taught number (here, twice). In the meantime, a visual impact is given to the player by performing a notice effect or the like in the meantime, and an expectation for a reach effect to be performed thereafter can be improved.

  As described above, (4) Example 2 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described regarding the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As explained above, when the special pseudo-variable effect is finished and the reach effect is about to start, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed once more, and during that time, the notice effect etc. The player can have a strong expectation and can attract interest in the change. Next, (5) Example 3 of the variation display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect will be described.

[(5) Example 3 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-variable effect]
43 and 44 are continuous diagrams showing Example 3 of a special pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol.
These continuous diagrams are assumed to be a continuation from the state in which the left and right effect symbols shown in (V) in FIG. 42 are stopped and the reach state has occurred. That is, the case where it does not develop into reach production is assumed. Here, only the special pseudo-variable effect by the effect design will be described. For example, the reach effect and the like are the same as the above example (2), and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
In FIG. 43 (W): After the reach state has occurred, the medium effect design in which the numbers are written changes to a re-variable design, and a pseudo-joint effect is produced as if it has come down to the center of the display screen. Done. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the pseudo-continuous variation effect may be performed again without developing into a reach effect.

[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 43, (X): The re-variation symbol that has been beaten until then stops at the center position of the display screen, and the pseudo-continuous determination (fourth pseudo-continuous) is made. In this example, the female character shown in the re-variable symbol is shown with the eyes open and the flames are being blown up from the whole. Also, in the upper left part of the display screen, an effect of changing from “(× 3)” to an effect image in which characters “(× 4)” are written is performed. Thereby, it can be instructed to the player that it is determined that the fourth pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol will be performed.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 43 (Y): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stops. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“7” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

  The time from the start of the third special pseudo-variable effect (T in FIG. 41) to the end (Y in FIG. 43) is the first time of the special pseudo-variable effect. Is set to a long time. For example, the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 3 seconds, while the third time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. As described above, the pseudo continuous variation effect that is to be performed twice or more takes a long time to perform the pseudo continuous variation effect that is performed in the order of the larger value than the taught number (here, twice). In the meantime, a visual impact is given to the player by performing a notice effect or the like in the meantime, and an expectation for a reach effect to be performed thereafter can be improved.

[Revariation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (fourth)]
In FIG. 43 (Z): the temporarily stopped effect design starts to change again, and the fourth pseudo-change effect is performed.

[Left design stop]
44 (a): After that, a certain amount of time has elapsed, and the left effect design representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. In addition, before the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice effect described above may be performed to indicate that the big hit expectation is high.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 44 (b): After this, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
44 (c): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Thereafter, the reach effect described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

  As described above, the time from the start of the special pseudo-variable effect fourth time ((Z) in FIG. 43) to the end ((c) in FIG. 44) is the first time of the special pseudo-variable effect. It is set to a long time with respect to the time. For example, the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 3 seconds, while the fourth time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. As described above, the pseudo continuous variation effect that is to be performed twice or more takes a long time to perform the pseudo continuous variation effect that is performed in the order of the larger value than the taught number (here, twice). In the meantime, a visual impact is further given to the player by performing a notice effect and the like, and a sense of expectation for a reach effect to be performed thereafter can be further improved.

  As described above, (5) Example 3 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described regarding the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As explained above, when the special pseudo-variable effect is finished and the reach effect is about to start, another pseudo-continuous effect is performed once more, and during that time, the notice effect etc. is used to hit the big hit It is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation and attract more interest in the change. Next, (6) Example 4 of the variable display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described.

[(6) Example 4 of variation display effect including special pseudo-variable effect]
45 to 48 are continuous diagrams showing Example 4 of special pseudo-continuous variation effects based on effect symbols.
It is assumed that the gaming state is in the “time reduction state” and the variable display related to the second special symbol is being executed. Further, it is assumed that there are four operation memories corresponding to the first special symbol and one operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol.

[Operating memory increase effect]
[Special working memory effect]
In FIG. 45 (A): during the variable display effect of the effect symbol performed in conjunction with the variable display related to the second special symbol, a new working memory is recorded due to the winning at the right start winning opening 28a. Since one is added, one new marker M2 is additionally displayed on the right side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen, and a total of two are displayed. At this time point, the special operation memory effect related to the special pseudo-continuous variation effect (the effect of displaying the special pseudo-continuous number in the marker) is not performed for the newly displayed marker M2, An effect of displaying the normal red display color marker M2 is performed (special operation memory effect). Therefore, at this time, only the number of working memories (the number of working memories) is taught to the player.

[Stop display effect]
45 (B): Thereafter, all effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol (the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stop in order, and finally the middle effect symbol stops). . In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “8”-“7”-“3”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the second special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Next fluctuation start]
45 (C): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, there are working memories (4) corresponding to the first special symbol and working memories (2) corresponding to the second special symbol, but the second special symbol is given priority, so there is a special memory. One operation memory corresponding to the symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special action memory effect change effect]
Further, since the number of working memories of the second special symbol is decreased by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M2 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. In other words, although there were two working memories so far, the earliest (older) one that was displayed closest to the center (first position) in the marker M2 is shifted and displayed in the changing area HA. The effects consumed by the internal lottery are also performed. Then, the marker M2 displayed at the second position from the center is shifted and displayed at the first position. Further, when the shift display is performed at the first position, an effect (marking operation effect change effect for special operation memory effect) is performed in which the marker M2 changes to an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are written. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that it has been determined that the special pseudo-variable effect is executed three times or more. The special action memory effect content change effect in which the marker M2 changes is not limited to when the number of action memories decreases, and is performed after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the increase (appearance) of action memory. Also good. As a result, it is possible to teach that it is determined that a special pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed other than when the working memory is increased, so that the player is always attracted to the special pseudo continuous variation effect. be able to.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 45 (D): Thereafter, all effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol (the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and finally the middle effect symbol stop). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “4”-“5”-“9”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of focus”.

[Next fluctuation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (first time)]
In FIG. 46 (E): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, there are working memory (4) corresponding to the first special symbol and working memory (1) corresponding to the second special symbol, but since the second special symbol has priority, the special memory is special. One operation memory corresponding to the symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special working memory consumption effect]
In addition, with the consumption of the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the marker M2 displayed with the characters “(× 3)” displayed on the right side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen is displayed in the changing area HA. An effect to be moved is performed (stored number display effect executing means). Then, when the marker M2 in which “(× 3)” moved to the changing area HA is displayed in an enlarged manner, characters such as “(× 3)” are described in the upper left part of the display screen. An effect in which an effect image appears is performed (special operation memory consumption effect). In addition, the female character in the medium effect symbol is “pseudo three or more times!” Along with the effect that the medium effect symbol that was stopped and displayed in the previous stop display effect ((D) in FIG. 45) is enlarged. A line production that tells you is performed (special working memory consumption production). Further, at this time, the same sound may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 displayed as “pseudo-continuous 3 times or more!”. By performing such a special operation memory consumption effect, it is possible to easily tell the player that “three or more pseudo-continuous variation effects will be started from now on”. In addition, since the display is “(× 3)”, the dialogue by the female character displayed in the screen display may be “Pseudo 3 times!”. When the fourth time is performed three times or more, the player can have a strong sense of expectation for the big hit and can attract interest in the change.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 46 (F): Immediately after the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (for example, after 2.0 seconds), the variation of the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped in order, and finally the re-variable symbol is displayed. It stops at the center position of the display screen, and the quasi-continuation is confirmed (2 quasi-continuations). In this example, the left effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen, the right effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped, and finally the female character represented in the re-variation symbol is opened, It shows how the flame is being blown out from the whole.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 46 (G): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stop points. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“8” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

[Revariation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (second time)]
In FIG. 46 (H): the temporarily stopped effect symbol starts to change again, and the second pseudo-variable effect effect is performed.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 47 (I): Immediately after the start of re-variation (for example, 2.0 seconds later), the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop changing in order, and finally the re-change symbol is at the center position of the display screen. It stops, and it becomes pseudo continuous determination (3 times pseudo continuous). In this example, the left effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen, the right effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped, and finally the female character represented in the re-variation symbol is opened, It shows how the flame is being blown out from the whole.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 47 (J): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stop points. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“8” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this.

  In addition, with the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the first special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started ((E) in FIG. 46) until the first special pseudo-continuous variation effect is finished. After the time of (G in FIG. 46) and the second time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started ((H) in FIG. 46) until the second time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect ends (FIG. 46). 47 (J)) is set to about 3 seconds. In this way, the pseudo-continuous variation effect that is to be performed three times or more is performed in the order (first and second times) before the order of the taught number (here, three times). The time required for the changing performance is set to a very short time.

[Revariation start]
[Special quasi-variable production (third time)]
In FIG. 47 (K): The temporarily stopped effect design starts to change again, and the third pseudo-change effect is performed.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 47 (L): After a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect design representing the number “7” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. In addition, before the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the step-up notice effect described above may be performed to indicate that the big hit expectation is high.

[Right design stop]
In FIG. 48 (M): Thereafter, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed after the left effect symbol, and the effect of generating the reach state is performed. In this example, the combination of effect symbols is “7” − “Fluctuating (↓)” − “7”, indicating that a reach state has occurred on the effect.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 48 (N): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56. Thereafter, the reach effect described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
[Revariation stop]
In FIG. 48 (O): After the reach state has occurred, the medium effect symbol changes to a re-variable symbol, and a pseudo-continuous effect is performed as if it has come down to the center position of the display screen, and then re-variable The symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, and the quasi-continuation is determined (four times quasi-continuation). In this example, the female character shown in the re-variable symbol is shown with the eyes open and the flames are being blown up from the whole. Also, in the upper left part of the display screen, an effect of changing from “(× 3)” to an effect image in which characters “(× 4)” are written is performed. Thereby, it can be instructed to the player that it is determined that the fourth pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol will be performed.

[Continuous production]
In FIG. 48 (P): When the re-variation symbol stops at the center position of the display screen, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are displayed with temporary stop points. In this example, a temporary stop output of “7”-“8”-“7” is formed on the left, middle, and right by temporarily stopping in a manner in which the middle performance symbol represents the number “8”, for example. Yes. In the display screen, for example, “continuation” character information is displayed at the lower center position, which indicates that the variable display effect continues after this. After that, a special pseudo-continuous variation effect for about 15 seconds is performed for the fourth time, and when the reach state occurs, the reach effect described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

  Note that the time from the start of the third special pseudo-variable effect production ((K) in FIG. 47) to the end ((N) in FIG. 48 or (O) in FIG. 48) is the special pseudo-continuous production time. The time is set to be longer than the first and second times of the fluctuating effects. For example, the first and second special pseudo-continuous variation effects are set to about 3 seconds, while the third special pseudo-continuous variation effect is set to about 15 seconds. As described above, for the pseudo-continuous variation effect that is to be performed three times or more, the time required for the pseudo-continuous variation effect performed in the order of the value more than the taught number (here, three times) is long. It is set, and a visual impact is given to the player by performing a notice effect in the meantime, and an expectation for a reach effect to be performed thereafter can be improved.

  As described above, (4) Example 4 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described with respect to the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As described above, the right start winning opening 28a is won, and the normal working memory increase effect (normal marker M2 display) not related to the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed at the time of the working memory increase effect, and then for a certain period of time. After the elapse of time, a change to a special working memory is performed (marker M2 display indicating “(× 3)”). After that, at the time of the change, a special pseudo-continuous change effect as taught by changing to a special working memory is started. In this way, by changing to a special working memory effect that teaches that a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed before the change starts, not only at the time of working memory increase effect performed after winning a prize, It is possible to make the player always have a strong expectation for the big hit and to attract more interest in the fluctuation. Next, (7) Example 5 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described.

[(7) Example 5 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-variable effect]
FIG. 49 is a continuous diagram showing a fifth example of a special pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol. This continuous diagram shows the second special symbol in a state where there are four working memories corresponding to the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45B and two working memories corresponding to the second special symbol. Assume that all effect symbols are stopped in synchronization with the stop display, and the start condition of the next first special symbol or second special symbol is satisfied. Then, in the case of not proceeding to the special action memory effect content change effect shown in FIG. 45C (effect that changes from the marker M2 in the normal red display color to the marker M2 that teaches the number of special pseudo-variable effect effects). Is assumed.

[Variable display effects]
[Working memory consumption effect]
[Special working memory effect]
In FIG. 49 (C): A variable display effect in which the effect symbol scrolls and fluctuates is performed in synchronization with the variable display related to the second special symbol. At the same time, with the consumption of the working memory, an effect of moving the marker M2 displayed on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed (memory number display effect executing means). Then, since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one as the change starts, the display number of the marker M2 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. For example, there were two working memories so far, but the earliest (old) one that was displayed closest to the center in the marker M2 is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery The production will be performed together. At this time, the special operation memory content change effect related to the special pseudo-variable effect (a special pseudo-continuous number is newly added in the marker from the red display color marker M2 for the newly-shifted marker M2 is displayed. The effect to display) is not performed, and the effect that the marker M2 of the normal red display color is displayed is performed (special operation memory effect). Therefore, at this time, only the increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) are taught to the player.

[Stop display effect]
49D: After that, the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop in order, and the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the numeral “5” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “4” − “5” − “9”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. At this time, the special operation memory content change effect related to the special pseudo-variable effect (the effect of displaying the special pseudo-continuous number in the marker) is not performed for the marker M2, and the normal red An effect in which the display color marker M2 is displayed is performed (special operation memory effect). Therefore, at this time, only the increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) are taught to the player.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 49 (E): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, there are working memory (4) corresponding to the first special symbol and working memory (1) corresponding to the second special symbol, but since the second special symbol has priority, the special memory is special. One operation memory corresponding to the symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

[Special working memory consumption effect]
[Special pseudo-variable production (first time)]
In addition, with the consumption of the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol, an effect of moving the red display color marker M2 displayed on the right side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed (memory). Number display effect execution means). Then, when the shift display to the changing area HA is finished, the marker M2 in which the characters “(× 3)” are written is displayed, and the marker M2 in which “(× 3)” is written is enlarged and displayed. (Special operation memory consumption effect). Then, in the upper left portion of the display screen, an effect is produced in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are written appears (special operation memory consumption effect). Furthermore, along with the effect that the medium effect symbol that was stopped and displayed in the previous stop display effect ((D) in FIG. 49) is enlarged, the female character in the medium effect symbol is “pseudo three or more times!”. A line production that tells you is performed (special working memory consumption production). Further, at this time, the same sound may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 displayed as “pseudo-continuous 3 times or more!”. By performing such a special operation memory consumption effect, it is possible to easily tell the player that “three or more pseudo-continuous variation effects will be started from now on”.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
[Revariation stop]
FIG. 49 (F): Immediately after the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started (for example, after 2.0 seconds), the variation of the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol is stopped in order, and finally the revariable symbol is displayed. It stops at the center position of the display screen, and the quasi-continuation is confirmed (2 quasi-continuations). In this example, the left effect symbol representing the number “7” is stopped on the screen, the right effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped, and finally the female character represented in the re-variation symbol is opened, It shows how the flame is being blown out from the whole. Thereafter, as in (G) and thereafter in FIG. 46, the first and second special pseudo-continuous variation effects are finished in a short time (for example, about 3 seconds each), and the third special pseudo-continuous variation effect is After reaching a longer time (for example, about 15 seconds), the reach production described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) is performed.

  As described above, (5) Example 5 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described with respect to the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As described above, the winning at the right start winning opening 28a is won, and at the time of the working memory increase effect, the normal working memory increase effect (ordinary marker M2 display) not related to the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed, and then the variation Sometimes it changes to a special working memory (marker M2 display with “(× 3)”). At the same time, a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started as taught by changing to a special working memory. In this way, by changing to a special working memory effect that teaches that a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed not only at the time of working memory increase effect performed after winning a prize but also at the time of the change, a strong hit to the big hit It is possible to make the player always have a sense of expectation and attract more interest in the fluctuation. Next, (6) Example 6 of a variable display effect including a special pseudo-continuous variable effect will be described.

[(8) Example 6 of variable display effect including special pseudo-variable effect]
50 to 51 are continuous diagrams showing Example 6 of special pseudo-continuous variation effects based on effect symbols. It is assumed that the gaming state is the “normal state (non-time shortening state)” and the stop display related to the first special symbol is complete. Further, it is assumed that there are four working memories corresponding to the first special symbol and no working memories corresponding to the second special symbol.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 50 (A): All effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol (the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and finally the middle effect symbol stop). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “2”-“2”-“5”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of focus”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that “the stop display of the first special symbol has been confirmed”.

[Special working memory effect]
At this time, the special operation memory effect related to the special pseudo-variable effect (the effect of displaying the special pseudo-continuous number in the marker) is not performed for the four displayed markers M1. The effect that all the markers M1 are displayed in the normal red display color is performed (special operation memory effect). Therefore, at this time, only the number of working memories (the number of working memories) is taught to the player.

  (B) in FIG. 50: After that, a variable display effect in which the effect symbol is scrolled is performed in synchronization with the variable display related to the first special symbol. At the same time, with the consumption of the working memory, an effect of moving the marker M1 displayed on the left side of the band-like area at the lower part of the display screen to the changing area HA is performed (memory number display effect executing means). Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, there have been four working memories so far, but the oldest (oldest) one that was displayed closest to the center in the marker M1 is shifted to the changing area HA and consumed by internal lottery. The production will be performed together. At this point, the special operation memory content change effect related to the special pseudo-continuous variation effect (a special pseudo-continuous number is newly added in the marker from the blue display color marker M1) for the newly-shifted marker M1. The effect to display) is not performed, and the effect that three normal blue display color markers M1 are displayed side by side is performed (special operation memory effect). Therefore, at this time, only the number of working memories (the number of working memories) is taught to the player.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 50 (C): All effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol (the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop in order, and finally the middle effect symbol stops). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “3”-“1”-“5”, it is expressed in the effect that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out of focus”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Next fluctuation start]
(D) in FIG. 50: When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special action memory effect change effect]
Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. In other words, the number of operating memories has been three so far, but the earliest (older) one that is displayed closest to the center (first position) in the marker M1 is shifted and displayed in the changing area HA. The effects consumed by the internal lottery are also performed. Then, the markers M1 displayed at the second and third positions from the center are shifted and displayed at the first and second positions, respectively. Here, an effect (special action memory effect content change effect) in which the marker M1 shifted and displayed at the second position is changed to an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are written is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that it has been determined that the special pseudo-variable effect is executed twice or more. The special action memory effect content change effect in which the marker M1 changes is not limited to when the number of action memories decreases, and is performed after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the increase (appearance) of action memory. Also good. As a result, it is possible to teach that it is determined that a special pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed other than when the working memory is increased, so that the player is always attracted to the special pseudo continuous variation effect. be able to.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 51, (E): All effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol (the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop in order, and finally the middle effect symbol stops). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “3”-“1”-“5”, it is expressed in the effect that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out of focus”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 51 (F): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special action memory effect change effect]
Further, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol is decreased by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. That is, although there were two working memories so far, the earliest (older) one displayed at the most central position (first position) in the marker M1 is shifted and displayed in the changing area HA. The effects consumed by the internal lottery are also performed. Then, the marker M1 displayed at the second position from the center is shifted and displayed at the first position. Here, an effect (special action memory effect content change effect) in which the marker M1 shifted and displayed at the first position is changed to an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are written is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the special pseudo-variation effect has been changed from being executed twice or more to three times or more. The special action memory effect content change effect in which the marker M1 changes is not limited to when the number of action memories decreases, and is performed after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the increase (appearance) of action memory. Also good.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 51 (G): All effect symbols stop in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol (the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol stop in order, and finally the middle effect symbol stops). In this example, since the combination of effect symbols is “1”-“2”-“5”, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of focus”.

[Next fluctuation start]
[Special pseudo-variable production (first time)]
In FIG. 51 (H): When the stop display time of the first special symbol elapses, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is consumed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special working memory consumption effect]
In addition, with the consumption of the working memory corresponding to the first special symbol, the marker M1 on which the characters “(× 3)” displayed on the left side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen are displayed in the changing area HA. An effect to be moved is performed (stored number display effect executing means). Then, when the shift display to the changing area HA is finished, the marker M1 in which the characters “(× 4)” are written is displayed, and the marker M1 in which “(× 4)” is written is enlarged and displayed. (Special operation memory consumption effect). Then, in the upper left part of the display screen, an effect is produced in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 4)” appear appears (special operation memory consumption effect). In addition, the female character in the medium effect symbol is “pseudo four or more times!” Along with the effect that the medium effect symbol that was stopped and displayed in the previous stop display effect ((G) in FIG. 51) is enlarged. A line production that tells you is performed (special working memory consumption production). Further, at this time, the same sound may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 displayed as “Pseudo-continuous 4 times or more!”. By performing such a special operation memory consumption effect, it is possible to easily tell the player that “four or more pseudo continuous variation effects will be started from now on”.

  After that, as in (F) onward in FIG. 46, the first, second and third special pseudo-continuous variation effects are finished in a short time (for example, about 3 seconds each), In the fourth time, the reach effect and the like described above (FIGS. 31 to 31) are performed after a longer time (for example, about 15 seconds).

  As described above, (6) Example 6 of the change display effect and the stop display effect including the special pseudo-continuous change effect has been described with respect to the basic effect for each change in the present embodiment. As described above, the right start winning opening 28a is won, and at the time of the working memory increase effect, the normal working memory increase effect (normal marker M1 display) not related to the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed, and then for some time. After the elapse of time, the display changes to a special working memory (display that sequentially changes to the marker M1 in which “(× 2)”, “(× 3)”, and “(× 4)” are written). After that, at the time of the change, a special pseudo-continuous change effect as taught by changing to a special working memory is started. In this way, by changing to a special working memory effect that teaches that a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed before the change starts, not only at the time of working memory increase effect performed after winning a prize, It is possible to make the player always have a strong expectation for the big hit and to attract more interest in the fluctuation.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. Progress-related effects such as the above-described variable display effects, normal or special pseudo-continuous variable effects, reach effects, pre-reach notice effects, memory number display effects, working memory consumption effects, special action memory effects, special action memory effects, etc. An additional effect, a mode transition effect, a pre-determination effect (so-called prefetch effect), and the like that are linked to this are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning tone control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, number of rounds command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, variation pattern There are destination judgment commands and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 (variation). Display effect pattern selection means, frequency progression means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (pseudo-variable start notice effect, effect button notice effect, button effect, reach occurrence notice effect before reach, effect after reach occurrence, etc.) or additional effect. Select a production pattern (line production). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a variation display effect pattern of the effect symbol (variation effect pattern determination random number), a random number used for selection of a notice, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), a special There are random numbers (effect random numbers at the time of increase in special effect operation memory) used for selection of effect patterns at the time of increase in operation memory corresponding to such pseudo-continuous variation effects. These random numbers are, for example, software random numbers, and any numerical value from 0 to 255 is set to each random number value in the counter area of the RAM 130.

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, when there is a movable body for presentation, the presentation control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the movable body driving IC. Although not particularly illustrated, the movable body is operated by a driving source such as a solenoid or a stepping motor, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. These solenoids, stepping motors, and other driving sources can be connected to, for example, the panel electric decoration board 138 in FIG.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S420: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (Yes), the production control CPU 126 next executes step S421. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S425.

  Step S421: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the change pattern destination determination command received from the main control CPU 72 is a change pattern command when there is a special effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, analyzes the change pattern destination determination command, and as a result of the analysis, after the reach with the special effect, the deviation change patterns 9 to 14 or the change pattern after the reach with the special effect. It is confirmed whether it is any one of 25-30 (variation pattern numbers 9-14, 25-30). If the variation pattern number determination command is one of the variation pattern numbers 9 to 14 and 25 to 30 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S423. On the other hand, if the variation pattern number determination command is not any of the variation pattern numbers 9 to 14 and 25 to 30 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S422.

  Step S422: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal effect operation memory number increase effect selection process. Specifically, the content (effect pattern) about the effect at the time of the increase of the working memory corresponding to the change regarding the special symbol for which the special pseudo-variable effect is not performed is selectively determined, and the determined effect pattern is set. Processing is executed. In addition, the content of the operation memory number increase effect selection process at the time of normal effect will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S423: The effect control CPU 126 increments (+1) the special effect flag value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag area of the RAM 130 and increases the value of the special effect flag by one and stores it. This special effect flag is a special variable display effect (special pseudo-continuous variable effect) that is stored while a maximum of eight operating memories (four each) are stored for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Represents the number of For example, when the value of the special effect flag is 0, it means that there is no working memory scheduled to perform a special pseudo-continuous variation effect at that time including the increased working memory. When the value is 1, it indicates that there is one working memory in which a special pseudo-variable effect is scheduled to be performed at that time including the increased working memory. In addition, when the value of the special effect flag is 2 or more, it is confirmed that there are two or more operation memories scheduled to perform a special pseudo-variable effect at that time including the increased operation memory. Represents.

  Step S424: The effect control CPU 126 executes an action memory number increase effect selection process at the time of special effect. Specifically, the process of selectively determining the content (effect pattern) about the effect at the time of the increase in the working memory corresponding to the change related to the special symbol in which the special pseudo-variable effect is performed, and setting the determined effect pattern Is executed. In addition, the content of the operation memory number increase effect selection process at the time of normal effect will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Operation memory increase increase selection process during normal performance]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation memory number increase effect selection process at the time of a normal effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S430: First, the effect control CPU 126 executes an analysis process of the effect command at the time of increase in the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, it is analyzed whether it is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and at the same time it is analyzed how many working memory numbers will be increased. Therefore, if the value of the effect command for increasing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BBH” as the preceding value of the upper byte representing the type of the command and “04H” as the lower byte, this effect It is analyzed that the command relates to the first special symbol and the number of working memories after the increase is the fourth. Then, the effect control CPU 126 determines a corresponding effect area where the working memory increase effect will be performed from now on based on the analysis result. For example, when the working memory to be increased is the fourth special symbol, the area at the left side of the strip-like area at the bottom of the display screen and the fourth position from the center is determined as the corresponding effect area. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S431.

  Step S431: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a normal effect operation memory increase effect content determination process. Specifically, the content (effect pattern) of the newly increasing operation memory display is determined using a selection table (not shown) or the like. For example, basic marker display (the operation memory display related to the first special symbol is the marker M1 in blue display color, the operation memory display related to the second special symbol is the marker M2 in red display color), the marker display by other display colors, the character One of display, item display, etc. is selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 may select a display mode. For example, a lighting method, presence / absence of blinking, and the like may be selected. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S432.

  Step S432: The effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the corresponding effect area analyzed in the effect command analysis process at the time of increasing the number of working memories, and the content (effect pattern) selected (determined) in the action effect increase effect content determining process at the previous normal effect. Based on the above, an effect for the newly displayed operation memory is set.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 53), and then proceeds to step S425.

[Processing for increasing the number of operating memories during special effects]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect memory number increase effect selection process at the time of special effect.

  Step S435: First, the effect control CPU 126 executes an analysis process of the effect command at the time of increase in the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, it is analyzed whether it is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and at the same time it is analyzed how many working memory numbers will be increased. Therefore, when the value of the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BCH” in the upper byte representing the type of the command and “02H” in the lower byte, It is analyzed that the command relates to the second special symbol and the number of working memories after the increase is second. Then, the effect control CPU 126 determines a corresponding effect area where the working memory increase effect will be performed from now on based on the analysis result. For example, when the increasing working memory is the second special symbol, it is determined that the region at the second position from the center on the right side of the belt-like region at the bottom of the display screen is the corresponding effect region. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S436.

  Step S436: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect operation memory increase effect content determination process. Specifically, the content (effect pattern) about the operation memory display to be newly increased is determined using the “operation memory increase effect content selection table at the time of special effect”.

[Example of an action memory increase production content selection table during special production]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of the action memory increase effect content selection table during a special effect.
This selection table is a table used when selecting an effect pattern (effect type) of operation memory at the time of increase corresponding to a variable display effect that executes a special pseudo-variable effect.

  The leftmost column in the special effect working memory increase effect content selection table shows the variation pattern number as a result of analyzing the variation pattern destination determination command received from the main control CPU 72. In the second column from the left, the distribution value for each effect type is shown for each variation pattern number, which corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100 for each variation pattern number. In the third column from the left, the effect type (either the special action memory effect or the special action memory effect) corresponding to each distribution value is shown. In the rightmost column, the specific performance contents are shown.

  Here, the special operation memory effect of the effect type represents the effect by the operation memory corresponding to the variation pattern number in which the special pseudo continuous variation effect is performed. For example, the number of times the special pseudo continuous variation effect is performed. This represents an effect in which a working memory with a corresponding number appears. Specifically, in the case of a variation pattern number in which a special pseudo-variable variation effect is performed three times or more, it represents an effect in which an action memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “(× 3)” appear. ing.

  On the other hand, the special operation memory effect of the effect type represents an effect by the operation memory that does not correspond to the variation pattern number in which the special pseudo continuous variation effect is performed. For example, a normal red display color or a blue display color An action memory in which an effect in which an action memory (marker) appears or a number that is not associated with the number of times that a special pseudo-continuous change effect is performed (a number smaller than that indicated in the special action memory effect) appears Represents the production. Specifically, in the case of a variation pattern number in which a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed three times or more, an effect in which a normal red display color or blue display color operation memory (marker) appears, or “(× 2) Represents an effect in which a working memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “” appear.

  For example, when the variation pattern number is “9” or “25”, the rate at which the special action memory effect is selected, specifically, the action memory in which characters such as “(× 2)” are written when increasing ( The ratio at which the effect (marker of the effect image) appears (for example, (D) in FIG. 36) is 70/100 (= 70%), and the ratio at which the special working memory effect is selected, specifically Is a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%) at which an effect in which a working memory (marker) of a normal red display color or blue display color appears at the time of increase is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern number is “10” or “26”, or when the variation pattern number is “11” or “27”, the ratio at which the special operation memory effect is selected, specifically Is a ratio of 70% (100%) in which an effect (for example, (D) in FIG. 36) in which an action memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “(× 2)” appear is displayed. = 70%), and the ratio at which the special action memory effect is selected, specifically, the ratio at which the effect that the normal red display color or blue display color action memory (marker) appears at the time of increase is selected. It is 30/100 (= 30%).

  Further, when the variation pattern number is “12” or “28”, or when the variation pattern number is “13” or “29”, the ratio of the special operation memory effect is selected, specifically, The ratio at which the effect in which the action memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “(× 3)” appear is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the special action memory effect ( Part 1) is selected, specifically, the ratio at which an effect in which an action memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “(× 2)” appear when it increases is selected. Are 30/100 (= 30%) respectively, and the ratio of the special operation memory effect (part 2) being selected, specifically, the operation memory (marker) of the normal red display color or blue display color when increasing (For example, (A in FIG. )) Is selected at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%).

  Further, when the variation pattern number is “14” or “30”, the ratio at which the special action memory effect is selected, specifically, the action memory in which characters such as “(× 4)” are written at the time of increase ( The ratio at which the effect in which the effect image marker) appears is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio at which the special action memory effect (part 1) is selected, specifically, The ratio of the effect that the action memory (marker of the effect image) in which characters such as “(× 3)” appear at the time of increase is 25/100 (= 25%), and the special action memory effect ( The ratio at which 2) is selected, specifically, the ratio at which the production in which the working memory (marker of the production image) in which characters such as “(× 2)” appear at the time of increase is selected is 20/100 (= 20%), special working memory effect (part 3) The selected ratio, specifically, an effect in which the operation memory (marker) of the normal red display color or blue display color appears at the time of increase (for example, when the operation memory related to (A) in FIG. 50 increases) is selected. The ratio is 5/100 (= 5%).

  In any case, if the effect at the time when the working memory increases this time is a variation pattern corresponding to a special pseudo-continuous variation effect, the effect control CPU 126 performs a selection lottery based on the effect random number when the special effect operating memory increases. Then, the effect pattern is selectively determined at the three-choice ratio shown in the special effect working memory increase effect content selection table. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 may select a display mode. For example, a lighting method, presence / absence of blinking, and the like may be selected. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S437.

[See FIG. 55: Operation Memory Number Increase Production Selection Process at Special Production]
Step S437: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect type selectively determined is the special action memory effect in the action memory increase effect content determination process at the time of the special effect. Specifically, it is confirmed whether it is a special action memory effect or a special action memory effect. If the effect type is a special action memory effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S438. On the other hand, when the effect type is a special action memory effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S439.

  Step S438: The effect control CPU 126 selects (determines) the effect in the corresponding effect area analyzed in the effect command analysis process at the time of increasing the number of working memories in the previous action memory increase effect content determination process at the time of the normal effect. Set to memory effect (effect pattern).

  Step S439: The effect control CPU 126 selects (determines) the effect in the corresponding effect area analyzed in the effect command analysis process at the time of increase in the number of operating memories in the previous action memory increase effect content determination process at the time of the normal effect. Set to memory effect (effect pattern).

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 53), and then proceeds to step S425.

[See FIG. 53: Working Memory Effect Management Process]
Step S425: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories is decreased is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (Yes), the production control CPU 126 next executes step S426. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command at the time of increasing the number of operating memories is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 52).

  Step S426: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the special effect flag value is a value greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the value of the special effect flag is greater than zero. If the value of the special effect flag is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 proceeds to step S428. On the other hand, when the value of the special effect flag is 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 proceeds to step S427.

  Step S427: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number decrease effect selection process during normal effect. Specifically, the content (effect pattern) about the effect at the time of the decrease of the working memory when the change related to the special symbol where the special pseudo-variable effect is performed is not included, and the determined effect pattern is The setting process is executed. The contents of the operation memory number reduction effect selection process at the time of the normal effect will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S428: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect operation memory number reduction effect selection process. Specifically, the content (effect pattern) about the effect at the time of the reduction of the working memory in the case where the change related to the special symbol in which the special pseudo-variable effect is performed is selectively determined, and the determined effect pattern is The setting process is executed. The contents of the action memory number reduction effect selection process during special effects will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Normal memory effect reduction selection process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation memory count reduction effect selection process during a normal effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S440: First, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect command analysis process when the number of working memories decreases received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, it is analyzed whether it is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and at the same time, the number of operating memories after the decrease is analyzed. Therefore, if the value of the production command for reducing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BBH” as the preceding value of the upper byte representing the type of the command and “13H” as the lower byte, this production The command relates to the first special symbol, and it is analyzed that the number of working memories after the decrease (current time) has become three from the four working memories up to the previous time. Then, the effect control CPU 126 determines a corresponding effect area where the working memory increase effect will be performed from now on based on the analysis result. For example, when the number of working memories after the reduction of the first special symbol becomes three, the fourth position from the center on the left side of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen is the erase (non-lighting) effect of the working memory display. The corresponding effect area is determined as the execution area, the other first to third position areas and the changing area as the execution area of the slide effect, and the changing area as the execution area of the working memory consumption effect. (To analyze. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S441.

  Step S441: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a slide effect setting process. Specifically, based on the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process when the number of working memories is decreased, the content about the slide effect is determined using a selection table or the like (not shown). For example, the result of analysis in the effect command analysis process when the number of working memories is decreased is that the present command is related to the first special symbol, and the working memory after being reduced from the previous four working memories (current) If the result is that the number is three, it is determined that the slide effect has the contents shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S442.

  Step S442: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal effect operation memory decrease effect content determination process. Specifically, the content of the effect in the changing area after the slide effect is determined using a selection table (not shown) or the like. For example, the content (effect pattern) is determined such that the working memory display is displayed in a large size, and the working memory that has been enlarged for a certain period of time is blinked and then hidden. In addition, the content such as changing the operation memory display in each corresponding effect area after the slide effect or during the slide effect may be determined using a selection table (not shown) or the like. For example, the content of changing from the basic marker display to the character display is selectively determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 may select a display mode. For example, a lighting method, presence / absence of blinking, and the like may be selected. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S433.

  Step S443: The effect control CPU 126 reduces the corresponding effect area analyzed in the previous effect command analysis process when the number of operating memories decreases, the content of the slide effect determined in the previous slide effect setting process, and the operation memory decrease during the previous normal effect. Based on the content (effect pattern) selected (determined) in the effect content determination process, an effect on the displayed operation memory is set.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 53).

[Operation memory number reduction effect selection process during special effects]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the action memory number reduction effect selection process at the time of a special effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S445: First, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect command analysis process when the number of working memories decreases received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, it is analyzed whether it is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and at the same time, the number of operating memories after the decrease is analyzed. Accordingly, when the value of the production command for reducing the number of working memories received from the main control CPU 72 is “BCH” in the upper byte representing the type of the command and “11H” in the lower byte, this production The command relates to the second special symbol, and it is analyzed that the number of working memories after reduction (this time) has become one from two working memories up to the previous time. Then, the effect control CPU 126 determines a corresponding effect area where the working memory increase effect will be performed from now on based on the analysis result. For example, when the number of working memories after the reduction of the second special symbol is 1, the working memory display is erased (not lit) at the second position from the center on the right side of the belt-like area at the bottom of the display screen. The corresponding effect area is determined (analyzed) with the first position area and the changing area as the execution area of the slide effect, and the changing area as the execution area of the working memory consumption effect. . The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S446.

  Step S446: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a slide effect setting process. Specifically, based on the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process when the number of working memories is decreased, the content about the slide effect is determined using a selection table or the like (not shown). For example, the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process at the time when the number of working memories is reduced is that the present command is related to the second special symbol, and the action memory after being reduced from the previous two working memories (this time). If the result is that the number is one, the slide effect having the contents shown in FIG. 45C is determined. In this process, when performing a slide effect in an area other than the changing area, for example, the first position from the area at the second position from the center on the right (or left) side of the strip area at the bottom of the display screen. When the action memory displayed in the special action memory effect is to be slid into the area, the special effect slide flag (slide from the area A to the area B) is performed. The content value AB may be input). The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S447.

  Step S447: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variation effect is a special effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, analyzes the change pattern command, and the result of the analysis is a shift pattern 9 to 14 after reaching with a special effect or a change pattern after reaching with a special effect. It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern number corresponds to 25-30 (variation pattern numbers 9-14, 25-30). As a result of analyzing the variation pattern command, if the variation pattern number is any one of the variation pattern numbers 9 to 14 and 25 to 30 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S448. On the other hand, as a result of analyzing the variation pattern command, if it is not any of the variation pattern numbers 9 to 14 and 25 to 30 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S449.

  Step S449: The effect control CPU 126 sets the effect in the changing area as the special operation memory consumption effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the normal operation storage consumption effect content (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern number using a selection table (not shown) or the like. For example, basic marker display (the operation memory display related to the first special symbol is the marker M1 in blue display color, the operation memory display related to the second special symbol is the marker M2 in red display color), the marker display by other display colors, the character Either one of display, item display, etc. is selected and set. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 may select a display mode. For example, a lighting method, presence / absence of blinking, and the like may be selected. The effect control CPU 126 then proceeds to step S455.

  Step S448: The effect control CPU 126 sets the effect in the changing area as the special operation memory consumption effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 sets the special operation memory consumption production content (production pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern number using the special operation memory consumption production content setting table.

[Special operation memory consumption effect content setting table]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the special operation memory consumption effect content setting table.
In the special operation memory consumption effect content setting table, for each variation pattern number corresponding to the variation for which the special pseudo-variable variation effect is performed (left column), the operation memory in the changing region when the variation starts. The effect content (right column) is consumed.

  For example, when the variation pattern number is “9” or “25”, an effect (for example, an effect image marker) in which characters such as “(× 2)” are written is consumed in the changing region (for example, 37 (F)) is set. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the special pseudo-variation effect is performed twice or more.

  In addition, when the variation pattern number is “10” or “26”, or when the variation pattern number is “11” or “27”, a character such as “(× 2)” is written. An effect (for example, FIG. 37 (F)) in which the working memory (marker of the effect image) is consumed in the changing region is set. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the special pseudo-variation effect is performed twice or more.

  Further, when the variation pattern number is “12” or “28”, or when the variation pattern number is “13” or “29”, the operation memory (“× 3”) in which characters such as “(× 3)” are written ( An effect (for example, FIGS. 46E and 49E) in which the effect image marker) is consumed in the changing region is set. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the special pseudo-variable effect is performed three times or more.

    In addition, when the variation pattern number is “14” or “30”, the operation memory (marker of the effect image) in which the characters “(× 4)” are written is consumed in the changing area (for example, , FIG. 51 (H)) is set. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the special pseudo-variation effect is performed four times or more.

[See FIG. 58: Operation Memory Number Decrease Effect Selection Processing at Special Effect]
As described above, when the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation in which the special pseudo-variable variation effect is performed has been selected, the special pseudo-sequence will be used in the working memory consumption effect performed in the changing region at the start of the variation. A player can be instructed of the number of times the variation effect is performed. Therefore, the effect content of the working memory before the change in which a special pseudo-variable effect is performed is not a special action memory effect, but an effect in which a special action memory effect (ordinary red display color or blue display color action memory (marker) appears. Or even if the value is smaller than the number of times that the special pseudo-variable effect is performed), the special action memory effect is changed from the special action memory effect to the special action memory effect at the start of the change. (For example, (D) in FIG. 49 → (E) in FIG. 49, (G) in FIG. 51 → (H) in FIG. 51)). When the effect control CPU 126 finishes the process of setting the effect in the changing area as the special operation memory consumption effect, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S450.

  Step S450: The effect control CPU 126 decrements (-1) the special effect flag value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag area of the RAM 130 and subtracts 1 from the value of the special effect flag and stores it. Therefore, the special effect flag after subtracting 1 is the remaining of the special change display effect (special pseudo-variable effect) that exists while the operation memory related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. It represents a number. For example, when the value of the special effect flag is 0, it means that there is no working memory scheduled to perform a special pseudo-variable effect after the next change, and the value of the special effect flag is 1. In this case, it means that there is one working memory in which a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is scheduled to be performed after the next variation. In addition, when the value of the special effect flag is 2 or more, it indicates that there are two or more working memories scheduled to perform the special pseudo-variable effect after the next change. Become. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S453.

  Step S453: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the working memory number is a value larger than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the value of the operating memory number is greater than 0 for the operating memory number after the reduction of the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process when the operating memory number is decreased (from 0) Whether it is large or zero). Note that the number of working memories to be confirmed in this process is the number of working memories obtained as a result of analysis in the effect command analyzing process when the number of working memories is reduced, and therefore the number of working memories related to any special symbol (maximum of four). This is not for the number of working memories (up to 8), which is the sum of the number of working memories for two special symbols. If the value of the number of working memories after reduction of the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process when the number of working memories is decreased is greater than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S455. On the other hand, when the value of the number of working memories after the reduction of the result analyzed in the effect command analysis process when the number of working memories is decreased is 0 (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the action memory effect management process (FIG. 53). To do.

  Step S455: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the special effect flag value is a value greater than zero. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the flag area of the RAM 130, refers to the value of the special effect flag, and checks whether or not the referred value is greater than 0 (greater than 0 or 0). To do. Therefore, in this processing, it is confirmed whether or not a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is scheduled to be performed for the variation after the variation relating to the special symbol subjected to the subtraction processing of the number of working memories. When the special effect flag value is greater than 0 (Yes), it is assumed that a special pseudo-continuous change effect is scheduled to be performed after the change, and the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S456. On the other hand, when the special effect flag value is 0 (No), it is assumed that no special pseudo-variable effect is scheduled to be performed after the change, and the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S460.

  Step S456: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a special action memory effect exists. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the setting for sliding the action memory displayed in the special action memory effect in the area other than the changing area is performed in the previous slide effect setting process. If a special effect slide flag is input in the previous slide effect setting process, the confirmation process may be executed based on the flag. Therefore, in this process, the special action memory effect is performed for the effect of the action memory of the change scheduled to perform the special pseudo-continuous change effect performed after the change related to the special symbol subjected to the subtraction process of the number of action memories. This represents processing for confirming whether or not there is. As a result of the confirmation, when the special operation memory effect is performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S457. On the other hand, when the special operation memory effect is not performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S452.

  Step S457: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special action memory effect content change selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect content about the action memory from the special action memory effect to the special action memory effect, changes from the special action memory effect to a different special action memory effect, or is special as it is. Whether to continue the working memory effect is determined using a selection table (not shown) or the like.

  For example, in a special effect operation memory increase effect content determination process, a change scheduled to perform a special pseudo-continuous change effect whose change pattern number is “12” (or “13”, “28”, “29”) It is assumed that a special action memory effect (part 2) (an effect in which a normal red display color or blue display color action memory (marker) appears at the time of increase (for example, (A) in FIG. 45)) is selected. . In such a case, change to a special action memory effect (for example, (C) in FIG. 45), change to a special action memory effect (No. 1), or continue as it is (for example, in FIG. 49 ( C)) is selectively determined.

  In addition, for example, a change scheduled to perform a special pseudo-continuous change effect whose change pattern number is “14” (or “30”) is a special action memory effect in the action memory increase effect content determination process during the special effect. (No. 3) A case is assumed where an effect (for example, before (A) in FIG. 50) in which an operation memory (marker) of a normal red display color or blue display color appears at the time of increase is selected. In such a case, change to the special action memory effect, change to the special action memory effect (part 1) or the special action memory effect (part 2), or continue as it is (for example, in FIG. )) Selectively.

  In addition, it is not limited to the case where the special action memory effect is selected in the action memory increase effect content determination process during the special effect, and if the effect content of the action memory in the area other than the changing area is the special action memory effect Special action memory effect content change selection processing is performed. Therefore, even when the special action memory effect content change selection process is not changed to the special action memory effect change selection process, the special action memory effect content change selection process is performed again. For example, when the special action memory effect content change selection process is not changed to the special action memory effect (for example, (B) in FIG. 50), the special action memory effect is changed to the special action memory effect (No. 1). Alternatively, it is selectively determined whether to change to the special action memory effect (part 2) (for example, (D) in FIG. 50) or to continue as it is. Similarly, when the special action memory effect content change selection process is not changed to the special action memory effect (for example, (D) in FIG. 50), the special action memory effect is changed to the special action memory effect (No. 1). ) (For example, (F) in FIG. 51) or to continue as it is is selectively determined.

  As described above, when it is selectively determined whether or not to change the content of the operation memory effect from the special operation memory effect to the special operation memory effect, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S458.

  Step S458: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not to change from the special action memory effect to the special action memory effect. As a result of the confirmation, when the change is made (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S459. On the other hand, when not changing (No), that is, when changing from a special operation memory effect to a different special operation memory effect, or when continuing as it is as a special operation memory effect, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S462.

  Step S459: The effect control CPU 126 changes the effect in the corresponding effect area. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of changing the effect content of the operation memory in the change target area to the effect content that is selectively determined in the special action memory effect content change selection process. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S462.

  Step S460: On the other hand, regarding the special symbol for which the number of working memories has been subtracted, if the fluctuation after the fluctuation is only due to the fluctuation that does not perform the special pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect, the effect control CPU 126 performs the action memory reduction effect content during the normal effect. Execute the decision process. Specifically, it is selectively determined using a selection table (not shown) or the like whether or not to change the contents of the action memory after the slide effect. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S462.

  Step S462: When the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect contents (effect pattern) by the action memory performed in each effect area (area other than the changing area) after the slide effect, the previous change process (step S459). If it is not changed, it is set to the same content as the previous content. In addition, in this process, when changing the production content, a schedule to be changed may be determined. For example, the setting for changing the timing from the special action memory effect to the special action memory effect is set immediately after the slide effect, or the setting is made during the variation time and when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the slide effect (for example, about 5 seconds). You may go.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the working memory effect management process (FIG. 53).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 14) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). The previous notice pattern, the notice pattern after the occurrence of reach, etc.) are selected, or an effect pattern for an additional effect (line effect) is selected (variable display effect pattern selection means, number of times progress means). In addition, when an effect pattern is selected, the effect table is referred to, the effect schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the effect pattern (variable effect time, type of reach and reach occurrence timing), stop display mode, etc. are determined, or additional effect For example, a notice effect schedule (timing of notice effect, display time, etc.) corresponding to (line effect) is determined. In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the result display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the result display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the result display effect. As a result, the result display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect) means). However, in the present embodiment, the result display effect is executed in a manner similar to or close to the loss when winning two rounds or at a small hit.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content (effect pattern) of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of promising big hit with a play, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 15-round prominent effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and this effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To direct. As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

  Alternatively, in the case of “two round big hit” (excluding the two-round probability variation win in a high probability state), the effect control CPU 126 may perform control to execute a mode transition effect (not particularly shown). Good. Further, in the case of “small hit”, the effect control CPU 126 may perform control to execute an effect similar to the mode transition effect (not particularly shown).

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 52) and the lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 52). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (variation display effect pattern selection means, number of times progression means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time by lottery based on the variation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. A plurality of effect pattern numbers are prepared in advance for one variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects an effect pattern number corresponding to the change pattern command at that time. be able to.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display To determine the mode of the Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  Although the above procedure corresponds to “small hit”, if it corresponds to 15 round big hit or 2 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process (fluctuation display effect pattern selection means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72 (or the variation pattern number obtained as a result of analyzing the variation pattern command). The production pattern number is determined by lottery. Further, the types of effect symbols determined here include those constituting the “combination at the time of two rounds of jackpot” in addition to those constituting the “hit combination”. In addition, the combination at the time of 2 round big hits shall be a combination of regular numbers such as “1-2-3” and “3-5-7” as described above (so-called chance win) Can do. Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  As in the case of small win, a plurality of variation effect pattern numbers at the time of big hit are prepared in advance for one variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect pattern selection table and changes the pattern command at that time. An effect pattern number corresponding to can be selected.

  Similarly to the small hit, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect design change schedule (change time and reach) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. Type and reach occurrence timing), stop display mode, etc. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of jackpot”. The contents of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of deviation (variable display effect pattern selection means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72 (or the variation pattern number obtained as a result of analyzing the variation pattern command). The production pattern number of the hour is determined by lottery. A plurality of effect pattern numbers are prepared in advance for one variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to the effect pattern selection table. it can. When the change effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) and determines the change schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, the mode of stop display, and the like. Note that the specific contents of the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of disconnection (variation display effect pattern selection means)]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (step S612 in FIG. 61). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S620: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change pattern command has a special effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, and based on the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command, is the variation pattern 9-14 after the reach with the special effect? The other fluctuation patterns 1 to 8 are confirmed. As a result of confirmation, if the variation pattern is 9 to 14 after the reach with the special effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S624. On the other hand, when it is other fluctuation patterns 1-8 (No), presentation control CPU126 performs step S621 next.

  Step S621: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the “fluctuation effect pattern selection table for normal effect at the time of detachment” used when selectively determining the variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol at the time of disconnection. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S622.

[Example of variation production pattern selection table for normal production at the time of loss]
FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect pattern selection table for a normal effect at the time of loss.
In the variation production pattern selection table for normal production at the time of loss, a variation production pattern number corresponding to a plurality of types of production is defined for each variation pattern number, and one of the variation production pattern numbers is selected from among them. The

  In addition, the variation effect pattern selection table for normal effect at the time of losing has a structure in which, for example, for each variation pattern number, “comparison value” and “variation effect pattern number” are sequentially stored from the head address as a set. . For example, when the fluctuation pattern number at the time of loss is “6” (shift fluctuation pattern 6 after reach), the “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “51”, “101”, “121” in stages. ,..., “255 (FFH)” are provided, and “variable effect pattern number” “100601” to “100610” is assigned to each “comparison value”. As the fluctuation effect pattern contents corresponding to these “fluctuation effect pattern number 100601” to “fluctuation effect pattern number 100610”, “reach fluctuation effect effect pattern 01” to “reach change effect effect pattern 10” are defined. . The contents of these ten variation effect patterns are different in the content (type) of the effect that will be performed within the same variation time, for example, reach reach effect (slip effect or normal pseudo continuous variation effect, etc.) Reach production is set differently. The number of “variation effect patterns” is not limited to 10 and may be more or less.

  Similarly, for the variation pattern numbers “1” to “5”, “7”, and “8” at the time of other loss, 10 “comparison values” and “variation effect pattern numbers” are provided as a set. In addition, “variable effect pattern content” is defined for each “variable effect pattern number”.

[Refer to FIG. 62: Variation Effect Pattern Selection Processing During Outage]
Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 determines a variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol (when the special pseudo-variable effect is not performed) for the normal effect at the time of deviation. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the change effect pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 52) and the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (analyzed change pattern command). The variation effect pattern number of the effect symbol is selectively determined on the basis of the “variation pattern number for fluctuation effect pattern selection table for normal effect at the time of detachment”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the shifted variation effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above-mentioned normal effect change effect pattern selection table at the time of deviation, and the random value is compared. If it is equal to or less than the value, the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation effect pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern number is “6” and the variation effect pattern determination random value is “77”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “51”. The control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “101” with the random number value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “100602” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number.

  Further, in addition to the determination of the variation effect pattern number, the stop display mode using the effect symbol may be determined in this process. Specifically, a mode of a temporary stop of a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect design (for example, “5” − “6” − “6” by the left / middle / right effect design of (H) in FIG. 32) Appearance), a state when the reach state occurs (for example, “7”-“changed”-“7” outcome according to the left / right effect design in (K) in FIG. 33), and a mode at the time of stop display (For example, the difference between “7”-“8”-“7” in FIG. 35 (S)) may be determined. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S623.

  Note that for the variation pattern numbers “1” to “8”, the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, (C) in FIG. 30 to (E) in FIG. 31, (F) to FIG. 32 in FIG. 32). The variation effect pattern content including medium (L)) may be selected, but the variation effect pattern content including a special pseudo-variable variation effect is not selected.

  Step S623: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect schedule setting process for normal effect at the time of deviation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) for the effect design change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number, and determines the effect design change effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. To do. Specifically, schedule settings such as the start and end timings of the variable display effect by the effect design, the start and end timings of the reach effect, and the like are performed.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 61), and then proceeds to step S614.

  Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the “fluctuation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of loss” used when determining the effect effect pattern number related to the effect symbol at the time of loss. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S625.

[Example of variation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of loss]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of loss.
In the variation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of loss, each variation effect pattern number corresponding to a plurality of types of effects is defined in advance for each variation pattern number, and one of the variation effect pattern numbers is selected. The

  In addition, the variation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of losing has a structure in which, for example, for each variation pattern number, a “comparison value” and a “variation effect pattern number” are stored as a set in order from the head address. . For example, when the variation pattern number at the time of loss is “9” (the shift variation pattern 9 after reaching with special effects), the “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “51”, “101”, “121”,..., “255 (FFH)” are provided, and “variation effect pattern number” “101101” to “101110” is assigned to each “comparison value”. As the fluctuation effect pattern contents corresponding to these “fluctuation effect pattern number 101101” to “fluctuation effect pattern number 101110”, “reach fluctuation special effect pattern 01” to “reach fluctuation special effect pattern 10” are defined. ing. The contents of these ten variation effect patterns are different in the content (type) of the effect to be performed within the same variation time for the special pseudo-continuous variation effect. The types (contents) and the types (contents) of reach production are different. Note that the type (contents) of each production is set differently, and the time from the start of the production to the reach production (time required for the special pseudo-variation production), the reach production to the confirmation stop display The time required for production is the same. Further, the number of “variation effect patterns” is not limited to 10 and may be more or less.

  Similarly, for the other variation pattern numbers “10” to “14”, ten “comparison values” and “variation effect pattern numbers” are provided as a set. "Variation effect pattern content" is defined for each.

[Refer to FIG. 62: Variation Effect Pattern Selection Processing During Outage]
Step S625: The effect control CPU 126 determines a variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol (when performing a special pseudo-variable effect) for the special effect at the time of losing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the change effect pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 52) and the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (analyzed change pattern command). The variation effect pattern number of the effect symbol is selectively determined on the basis of the “variation pattern number)” and the “variation effect pattern selection table for special effect at the time of loss” referred to. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the shifted variation effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above-mentioned variation effect pattern selection table for the special effect at the time of losing, and the random value is compared. If it is equal to or less than the value, the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation effect pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern number is “9” and the variation effect pattern determination random value is “77”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “51”. The control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “101” with the random number value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “101102” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number.

  Further, in addition to the determination of the variable effect pattern number, the stop display or temporary stop display mode of the effect symbol may be determined in this process, that is, the temporary stop corresponding to the special pseudo-continuous variable effect based on the effect symbol. A display mode, a stop display mode after reach production, or the like may be determined. Specifically, a mode at the time of temporary stop at the first time of the special pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect design (for example, “7”-“8”-“by the left / middle / right effect design of (I) in FIG. 38) 8 ”), the state when the reach state is generated (for example,“ 7 ”-“ changed ”-“ 7 ”outcome according to the left / right effect design of (Q) in FIG. 40), and stop display You may determine the mode of time (for example, the gap of "7"-"8"-"7" of (S) in FIG. 35). In addition, you may also set up a pseudo-continuous production effect by production design. For example, in the case of pseudo-continuous production, whether the medium production design is changed to a re-variation design and it comes down to the center position of the display screen. You may set the aspect that such a pseudo-joint effect is performed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S626.

  Step S626: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect change effect production schedule setting process at the time of deviation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) for the effect design change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number, and determines the effect design change effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. To do. Specifically, schedules such as the timing of the start and end of the fluctuating display effect by the effect design, the timing of the start and temporary stop of the special pseudo-variable effect, the timing of the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing of the start and end of the reach effect, etc. Set up.

[Extraordinary special pattern pattern setting table]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a special effect pattern schedule setting table at the time of loss. The special effect pattern schedule setting table at the time of losing shows the schedule (variation time) of the fluctuation effects related to the special pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects (from the first time to the fourth time), and other effects (reach effects, etc.) Is set based on an effect table (not shown). Specifically, the time required for each predetermined variation number of special pseudo-continuous variation effects corresponding to each variation effect pattern number is set, and based on the set time, the special pseudo-continuous variation effect of the effect symbol is set. The schedule will be determined.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any of “101101” to “101110”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time and 15 seconds for the second time. It is set and not set for the third and fourth times. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (F) in FIG. 37), and the first special pseudo-variable variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (I) in FIG. 38, (J) in FIG. 38), and after 15 seconds, the second special pseudo-variable effect is finished and the reach state is reached. The schedule that occurs (for example, (Q) in FIG. 40) and then the reach effect is started is set.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any of “101201” to “101210”, the time required for each special pseudo-variable effect effect is 3 seconds for the first time, and for the second and third time. 15 seconds are set for each, and the fourth time is not set. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (F) in FIG. 37), and the first special pseudo-variable variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (I) in FIG. 38, (J) in FIG. 38), and the second special pseudo-variable effect is finished 15 seconds later. A special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (S) in FIG. 41, (T) in FIG. 41), and after 15 seconds, the third special pseudo-variable effect ends and a reach state occurs ( For example, in FIG. 42 (W)), a schedule that a reach effect is started thereafter is set.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any of “101301” to “101310”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time, the second time, the third time, and the fourth time. Each time is set to 15 seconds. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (F) in FIG. 37), and the first special pseudo-variable variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (I) in FIG. 38, (J) in FIG. 38), and the second special pseudo-variable effect is finished 15 seconds later. A special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (S) in FIG. 41, (T) in FIG. 41), and after 15 seconds, the third special pseudo-variable effect is finished and the fourth special pseudo-variation effect is finished. A continuous variation effect is started (for example, (Y) in FIG. 43, (Z) in FIG. 43), and after 15 seconds, the fourth special pseudo continuous variation effect ends and a reach state occurs (for example, FIG. 44 (c)), and then a schedule is set so that reach production is started. And thus.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101401” to “101410”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first and second times, and 3 seconds for the third time. 15 seconds is set, and the fourth time is not set. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (E) in FIG. 46), and the first special pseudo-continuous variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (G) in FIG. 46, (H) in FIG. 46), and the second special pseudo-continuous variation effect ends three seconds later. A special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (J) in FIG. 47, (K) in FIG. 47), and after 15 seconds, the third special pseudo-variable effect ends and a reach state occurs ( For example, in FIG. 48 (N)), a schedule that a reach effect is started thereafter is set.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101501” to “101510”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time and the second time for the third time. For the fourth time, 15 seconds are set. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (E) in FIG. 46), and the first special pseudo-continuous variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (G) in FIG. 46, (H) in FIG. 46), and the second special pseudo-continuous variation effect ends three seconds later. A special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (J) in FIG. 47, (K) in FIG. 47), and after 15 seconds, the third special pseudo-variable effect ends and the fourth special pseudo-variation effect is completed. A continuous fluctuation effect is started (for example, (P) in FIG. 48), and after 15 seconds, the fourth special pseudo-variable effect is finished, a reach state is generated, and then a reach effect is started. Will be set.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101601” to “101610”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-continuous variation effects is 3 for the first time, the second time, and the third time, respectively. Second and fourth are set to 15 seconds. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the representation symbol is started (for example, (H) in FIG. 51), and the first special pseudo-variable variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started, 3 seconds later, the second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is finished, and the third special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started. The special pseudo-variable effect is started for the fourth time after the special pseudo-variable effect is finished, and after 15 seconds, the fourth special pseudo-continuous effect is finished and a reach state is generated. A schedule to be started is set.

  As described above, when the variation effect pattern number and the schedule related to the effect symbol at the time of losing the special pseudo-continuous variation effect are set, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 61), and then step S614. Execute.

  Here, in the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of deviation, when the variation pattern number acquired from the main control CPU 72 is “1” to “8”, the contents of the variation effect pattern including the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect symbol. However, when the variation pattern number is “9” to “14”, the variation effect pattern content including the special pseudo-variable variation effect by the effect design is always selected. Moreover, the schedule of the pseudo-continuous variation effect is set for both the variation effect pattern content including the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect design and the variation effect pattern content including the special pseudo-continuous variation effect. The difference in schedule setting between these normal pseudo-variable effects and special pseudo-variable effects will be specifically described. When the schedule of the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect (three times) by the effect design is set, and the variation pattern number is “12”, the special pseudo-relation by the effect symbol is performed by the above-described variation effect pattern selection process at the time of the deviation. The case where the schedule of the change effect is set will be described.

[Schedule setting of normal pseudo-variable effect and special pseudo-variable effect]
FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing an example of a variation effect pattern including a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect and a variation effect pattern including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect.
Here, (A) and (B) in the figure correspond to a fluctuation effect pattern including a normal pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, and (C) and (D) in the figure include a special pseudo continuous fluctuation effect. It corresponds to the variation production pattern. In addition, (A) and (C) in the figure indicate changes in the special symbol variation display or stop display. And (B) and (D) in the figure show the contents of effects performed on the display screen.

  First, an example of a variation effect pattern including a normal pseudo continuous variation effect will be described. At time t1 (for example, 0 seconds), the special symbol variation display is started ((A) in the diagram), and the effect symbol variation display effect is started in conjunction therewith. The first performance will be started ((B) in the figure). Then, at a time t4 (for example, when 15 seconds have elapsed) after a certain amount of time has elapsed, the first normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect design is finished, and the second normal pseudo-continuous variation effect is started. Thereafter, at a time t6 (for example, when 30 seconds have elapsed) after a certain amount of time has elapsed, the second normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol is completed, and the third normal pseudo-continuous variation effect is started. Further, at a time t7 (for example, when 45 seconds have elapsed) after a certain amount of time has elapsed, the third time of the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol is finished, a reach state is generated, and then the reach effect is started. Therefore, when a variation effect pattern including a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect (three times) is selected, the time corresponding to the effect symbol 3 is displayed during the time T1 (for example, 45 seconds) after the special symbol variation display is started. The schedule setting is performed such that the pseudo-variable effect is performed over and over and the reach effect is performed thereafter.

  Next, an example of a variation effect pattern including a special pseudo continuous variation effect will be described. At the time t1 (for example, 0 seconds), a special symbol variation display is started at time t1 (for example, (C) in the figure) in order to synchronize with the start of a variation rendering pattern including a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect. It is assumed that the symbol variation display effect is started, that is, the first special pseudo-variable variation effect by the effect symbol is started ((D) in the diagram). Immediately after that, at time t2 (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed), the first normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol is finished, and the second normal pseudo-continuous variation effect is started. Furthermore, at the time t3 (for example, when 6 seconds have passed) immediately after that, the second normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol is finished, and the third normal pseudo-continuous variation effect is started. Then, at a time t5 (for example, when 21 seconds have elapsed) after a certain amount of time has elapsed, the third time of the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect based on the effect symbol ends, a reach state occurs, and then reach effect is started. Therefore, when a variation effect pattern (variation pattern number “12”) including a special pseudo-continuous variation effect (three times) is selected, the variation display of the special symbol is started for a time T1 (for example, 45). For a second), a schedule setting is performed in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed three times according to the effect symbol, and then a reach effect is performed.

  As described above, when comparing the fluctuation effect pattern including the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect by the effect design and the variation effect pattern including the special pseudo-continuous variation effect, the same number of times of the pseudo-variable effect is compared, The special pseudo-variable effect will end earlier and the reach effect will be performed. For example, in the variation effect pattern in which three special pseudo-continuous variation effects are performed corresponding to the variation pattern number “12”, the third special pseudo-continuous variation effect ends 21 seconds after the start of the variation, In the variation effect pattern in which the same number of normal pseudo continuous variation effects are performed, the third normal pseudo continuous variation effect ends 45 seconds later. Therefore, while maintaining the big hit expectation degree for the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the variation time required for the variation can be shortened and the game speed can be increased, or the time required for the reach effect without changing the variation time required for the variation. It is possible to execute an effect with a higher expectation level of big hits by setting a longer time. In addition, at the start of the change, a special operation memory consumption effect suggesting the number of special pseudo-continuous variation effects is performed in the changing region, and the number of times suggested in a shorter time than a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is smoother than usual without giving waiting time to the player.

[Big hit variation effect pattern selection processing (variable display effect pattern selection means)]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (step S610 in FIG. 61). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S630: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change pattern command has a special effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, and based on the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command, is the variation pattern 25 to 30 after reaching with special effect? Then, it is confirmed whether or not the other fluctuation patterns after reaching 21 to 24. As a result of the confirmation, if the variation pattern is after the reach with special effect and the fluctuation pattern is 25 to 30 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S634. On the other hand, if the variation pattern after reach is 25 to 30 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S631.

  Step S631: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the “big hit normal effect changing effect pattern selection table” used when selectively determining the changing effect pattern number relating to the effect symbol at the time of the big hit. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S632.

[Example of variation production pattern selection table for normal production during big hits]
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a variation presentation pattern selection table for normal presentation at the time of big hit.
The variation effect pattern selection table corresponding to a plurality of types of effects is defined in advance for each variation pattern number in the variation effect pattern selection table for the normal effect at the time of big hit, and one of the variation effect pattern numbers is selected from among them. The

  In addition, this big effect normal effect change effect pattern selection table has a structure in which, for example, for each change pattern number, “comparison value” and “change effect pattern number” are set and stored in order from the head address. . For example, when the variation pattern number at the big hit is “21” (variation pattern 21 after reach), the “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “51”, “101”, “121”. ,..., “255 (FFH)” are provided, and “200101” to “200110” of “variation effect pattern numbers” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”. As the contents of the fluctuation effect patterns corresponding to these “fluctuation effect pattern number 200101” to “fluctuation effect pattern number 200110”, “big hit reach change effect pattern 01” to “big hit reach change effect pattern 10” are defined. . The contents of these ten variation effect patterns are different in the content (type) of the effect that will be performed within the same variation time, for example, reach reach effect (slip effect or normal pseudo continuous variation effect, etc.) Reach production is set differently. The number of “variation effect patterns” is not limited to 10 and may be more or less.

  Similarly, with regard to the variation pattern numbers “22” to “24” at the time of other big hits, ten “comparison values” and “variation effect pattern numbers” are provided as a set, respectively. "Variation effect pattern content" is defined for each.

[Refer to Figure 67: Big hit hour variation production pattern selection process]
Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 determines a variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol (when the special pseudo-variable effect is not performed) for the normal effect at the time of the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the change effect pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 52) and the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (analyzed change pattern command). The variation effect pattern number of the effect symbol is selectively determined based on the “variation effect pattern number for the big hit normal effect” table referred to. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the shifted variation effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above-mentioned big effect normal effect change effect pattern selection table, and the random value is compared. If it is equal to or less than the value, the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation effect pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern number is “21” and the variation effect pattern determination random value is “77”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “51”. The control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “101” with the random number value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “200102” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number.

  Further, in this process, in the same way as the previous variation effect pattern number determination process, in addition to the determination of the change effect pattern number, the mode of stop display (including temporary stop display) by the effect symbol may be determined. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S633.

  As for the variation pattern numbers “21” to “24”, a normal pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, (C) in FIG. 30 to (E) in FIG. 31, (F) in FIG. 32 to FIG. 34). The variation effect pattern content including medium (L)) may be selected, but the variation effect pattern content including a special pseudo-variable variation effect is not selected.

  Step S633: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a big effect normal effect variable effect schedule setting process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) for the effect design change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number, and determines the effect design change effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. To do. Specifically, schedule settings such as the start and end timings of the variable display effect by the effect design, the start and end timings of the reach effect, and the like are performed.

  When the above procedure is executed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 61), and then proceeds to step S614.

  Step S634: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the “variable effect pattern selection table for special effect at big hit” used when determining the variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol at the big hit. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S635.

[Example of variation production pattern selection table for special production during big hits]
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect pattern selection table for special effects during a big hit.
In the variation effect pattern selection table for special effects at the time of big hit, for each variation pattern number, a variation effect pattern number corresponding to a plurality of types of effects is defined in advance, and one of the variation effect pattern numbers is selected from among them. The

  In addition, this big effect special effect change effect pattern selection table has a structure in which, for each change pattern number, a “comparison value” and a “change effect pattern number” are stored as a set in order from the head address. . For example, when the variation pattern number at the big hit is “25” (variation pattern 25 after reaching with special effects), the “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “51”, “101”, “121”,..., “255 (FFH)” are provided, and “20111” to “201110” of “variable effect pattern numbers” are assigned to each “comparison value”. As the contents of the fluctuation effect pattern corresponding to these “fluctuation effect pattern number 20111” to “fluctuation effect pattern number 201110”, “big hit reach variation special effect pattern 01” to “big hit reach change special effect pattern 10” are defined. ing. The contents of these ten variation effect patterns are different in the content (type) of the effect to be performed within the same variation time for the special pseudo-continuous variation effect. The types (contents) and the types (contents) of reach production are different. Note that the type (contents) of each production is set differently, and the time from the start of the production to the reach production (time required for the special pseudo-variation production), the reach production to the confirmation stop display The time required for production is the same. Further, the number of “variation effect patterns” is not limited to 10 and may be more or less.

  Similarly, with respect to other variation pattern numbers “26” to “30” at the time of the big hit, ten “comparison values” and “variation effect pattern numbers” are provided as a set, respectively. "Variation effect pattern content" is defined for each.

[Refer to Figure 67: Big hit hour variation production pattern selection process]
Step S635: The effect control CPU 126 determines a variable effect pattern number related to the effect symbol (when performing a special pseudo-variable effect) for the special effect at the time of the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 corresponds to the change effect pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 52) and the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (analyzed change pattern command). The variation effect pattern number of the effect symbol is selectively determined on the basis of the “variation pattern number” and the “variation effect pattern selection table for special effect at the big hit” referred to. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the shifted random effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variable effect pattern selection table for special effect at the big hit, and the random value is compared. If it is equal to or less than the value, the variation effect pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation effect pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern number is “25” and the variation effect pattern determination random value is “77”, the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “51”. The control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “101” with the random number value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “20112” as the corresponding variable effect pattern number.

  Further, in this process, in the same manner as the previous variation effect pattern number determination process, in addition to the determination of the change effect pattern number, the mode of stop display or temporary stop display by the effect symbol may be determined. That is, a temporary stop display mode corresponding to a special pseudo-continuous variation effect based on a design pattern, a stop display mode after a reach effect, or the like may be determined. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S636.

  Step S636: Next, the effect control CPU 126 executes a special effect variable effect schedule setting process for the big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) for the effect design change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number, and determines the effect design change effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. To do. Specifically, schedules such as the timing of the start and end of the fluctuating display effect by the effect design, the timing of the start and temporary stop of the special pseudo-variable effect, the timing of the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing of the start and end of the reach effect, etc. Set up.

[Special performance pattern schedule setting table for big hits]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special effect pattern schedule setting table for big hits. The big hit special effect pattern schedule setting table shows the schedule (variation time) of the fluctuation effects related to the special pseudo-continuous fluctuation effects (from the first time to the fourth time), and other effects (such as reach effects). Is set based on an effect table (not shown). Specifically, the time required for each predetermined variation number of special pseudo-continuous variation effects corresponding to each variation effect pattern number is set, and based on the set time, the special pseudo-continuous variation effect of the effect symbol is set. The schedule will be determined.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern numbers are “20111” to “201110”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is set to 3 seconds for the first time and 15 seconds for the second time. The third and fourth times are not set. Accordingly, in conjunction with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display effect by the effect symbol is started (for example, (F) in FIG. 37), and the first special pseudo-variable variation effect is finished three seconds later. The second special pseudo-continuous variation effect is started (for example, (I) in FIG. 38, (J) in FIG. 38), and after 15 seconds, the second special pseudo-variable effect is finished and the reach state is reached. The schedule that occurs (for example, (Q) in FIG. 40) and then the reach effect is started is set. In other words, the schedule of the special pseudo-variable effect at the time of big hit represents that the same schedule as the special pseudo-variable effect at the time of losing is set.

  In addition, when the variation effect pattern numbers are “201201” to “201210”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time, and for the second time and the third time, respectively. 15 seconds is set, and the fourth time is not set. When the variation effect pattern numbers are “201301” to “201310”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time, 15 times for the second time, the third time, and the fourth time, respectively. Second is set. When the variation effect pattern numbers are “20141” to “201410”, 3 seconds are set for the first and second times and 15 seconds are set for the third time as the time required for each special pseudo-variable effect effect. The fourth time is not set. When the variation effect pattern numbers are “201501” to “201510”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time and the second time, and 3 seconds for the third time and the fourth time, respectively. 15 seconds is set. When the variation effect pattern numbers are “201601” to “201610”, the time required for each number of special pseudo-variable effect effects is 3 seconds for the first time, the second time, and the third time, respectively for the fourth time. Is set to 15 seconds. Therefore, the schedule of the special pseudo-variable effect at the time of big hit represents that the same schedule as the special pseudo-variable effect at the time of losing is set.

  As described above, when the variable effect pattern number and schedule related to the effect symbol at the time of big hit for performing the special pseudo-variable effect are set, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-process (FIG. 61), and then step S614. Execute.

[Refer to Figure 61: Preliminary design change processing]
The above-described small hitting variation effect pattern selection processing (step S608) (not shown), the big hit variation effect pattern selection processing (step S610) (FIG. 62), or the loss variation variation effect pattern selection processing (step S612) ( When any one of the processes of FIG. 67) is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect includes, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning), the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state), the effect pattern number selected in the previous variation effect pattern selection process, etc. To be determined. As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  In this process, the effect control CPU 126 sets a notice effect to be displayed on the display screen during a special pseudo-variable effect. Specifically, the notice effect regarding the number of special pseudo-variable effects is set with reference to the “effect display content setting table in the upper left portion of the display screen during the special effect”.

[Production display content setting table in the upper left of the display screen during special production]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display content setting table in the upper left portion of the display screen during a special effect. In the effect display content setting table, the effect content displayed at each number of times that a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed is set for each variation effect pattern number.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101101” to “101110” and “20111” to “201110”, the effect displayed at the upper left portion of the display screen at each special pseudo-variable effect effect. For the first time, an effect is displayed in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is displayed (for example, (F) in FIG. 37 to (I) in FIG. 38). Also, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is set (for example, (J) in FIG. 38 to (Q) in FIG. 40).

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101201” to “101210” and “201201” to “201210”, the effect displayed at the upper left in the display screen at each special pseudo-variable effect effect number. For the first time, an effect is displayed in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is displayed (for example, (F) in FIG. 37 to (I) in FIG. 38). Also, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is set (for example, (J) in FIG. 38 to (Q) in FIG. 40), and for the third time, “(× 3) An effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “” are displayed is set (for example, (T) in FIG. 41 to (W) in FIG. 42). In addition, an effect may be set in which the character is changed from “(× 2)” to “(× 3)” in the middle of the second special pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, 41 (Q) to 41 (S)).

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any of “101301” to “101310” and “201301” to “201310”, the effect displayed at the upper left in the display screen at each special pseudo-variable effect effect For the first time, an effect is displayed in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is displayed (for example, (F) in FIG. 37 to (I) in FIG. 38). Also, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 2)” are displayed is set (for example, (J) in FIG. 38 to (Q) in FIG. 40), and for the third time, “(× 3) An effect that displays an effect image in which characters such as “” are displayed is set (for example, (T) in FIG. 41 to (W) in FIG. 42), and characters such as “(× 4)” are indicated for the fourth time. An effect is displayed to display the effect image. It is (e.g., in FIG. 43 (Z) in-FIG 44 (c)). An effect may be set in which a character such as “(× 3)” to “(× 4)” is changed from the middle of the third special pseudo-variable effect (for example, 43 (W) to 44 (Y)).

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101401” to “101410” and “20141” to “201410”, the effect displayed at the upper left in the display screen for each special pseudo-variable effect effect. For the first time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set for the first time (for example, (E) in FIG. 46 to (G) in FIG. 46, ( E), (F) in FIG. 49), and for the second time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set (for example, in (H) to FIG. 47 in FIG. 46). (J)) For the third time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set (for example, (K) in FIG. 47 to (N) in FIG. 48).

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101501” to “101510” and “201501” to “201510”, the effect displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen for each special pseudo-continuous variation effect. For the first time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set for the first time (for example, (E) in FIG. 46 to (G) in FIG. 46, ( E), (F) in FIG. 49), and for the second time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set (for example, in (H) to FIG. 47 in FIG. 46). (J)) For the third time, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 3)” are displayed is set (for example, (K) in FIG. 47 to (M) in FIG. 48), 4 For the second time, “(× 4)” is written. Demonstration is set which effect image is displayed (not shown). An effect may be set in which a character such as “(× 3)” to “(× 4)” is changed from the middle of the third special pseudo-variable effect (for example, (O in FIG. 48, (P) in FIG. 48).

  For example, when the variation effect pattern number is any one of “101601” to “101610” and “201601” to “201610”, the effect displayed at the upper left in the display screen at each special pseudo-continuous variation effect number. As the contents, an effect in which an effect image in which characters such as “(× 4)” are displayed is displayed for the first time (for example, (H) in FIG. 51), and “(× 4) "is set (not shown) in which an effect image in which characters such as" "are displayed is displayed.

  As described above, by performing an effect that displays the number of times that a special pseudo-variable effect has been confirmed (numerical values) on the display screen, the player has a strong expectation of a big hit and is interested in the change. Can be attracted. In addition, since the displayed number (number) is the minimum number of times that a special pseudo-continuous variation effect is performed, a special pseudo-continuous variation effect may be performed once or twice. By changing the number of times (numbers) that have been played, the player can have a strong sense of expectation for further jackpots, and can further attract interest in the change.

  When the setting related to the notice effect is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S616.

[Refer to Figure 61: Preliminary design change processing]
Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first determination effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a selection process for a destination determination effect that is executed while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed. Note that the pre-determination effect selected here is an effect pattern of an aspect that suggests a sense of expectation for the next and subsequent fluctuations, in addition to the pre-read effect for the display forms such as the markers M1, M2.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 60), the variation display effect (including the normal pseudo-continuous variation effect and the special pseudo-continuous variation effect is included based on the actually selected variation effect pattern. ) And a result display effect (effect performing means), and a notice effect (including an effect during special pseudo-continuous fluctuation) is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, an additional effect is executed based on the selected serif effect pattern (effect executing means), and various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here. (Production execution means).

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In addition, the images given in the other effects are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific set values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Left start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Right start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol Display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (5)

A lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element necessary for an internal lottery related to a player's profit when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs during a game;
Lottery element storage means for storing the lottery elements acquired by the lottery element acquisition means in the order in which the lottery elements are acquired up to a predetermined upper limit number;
An internal lottery execution means for consuming the lottery element stored by the lottery element storage means and executing the internal lottery when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied;
When the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution means, after the special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, the special symbol display means for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery,
In performing the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display means, after executing a variable display effect to display a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols that are combined with each other in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol within the variation time, Corresponding to the stop display mode of the special symbol by the special symbol display unit, the symbol effect execution unit for executing the result display effect of a mode in which all of the plurality of effect symbols are combined with each other in the stop display state
A variation pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of types of variation patterns including a normal variation pattern and a special variation pattern with respect to the length of the variation time in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display unit;
A variation pattern selecting means for selecting one of the plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when executing the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display means;
When the normal variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selection unit during the execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution unit, one special symbol variation display and stop display are performed within the variation time. When the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selecting unit, the variation effect is performed by performing the control of causing the symbol effect executing unit to execute the variation display effect of the effect symbol with the normal variation display effect pattern of the aspect representing Control is performed to cause the symbol effect execution means to execute the variable symbol display effect of the effect symbol in a special variable display effect pattern in a manner that artificially represents that the variable symbol display and stop display have been performed a plurality of times. A variable display effect pattern control means;
When the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selection unit, the pseudo variation display that is performed a plurality of times over a predetermined time after the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display unit is started. And a pseudo-continuous variation number appearing effect executing means for executing a pseudo-continuous variation number appearing effect of the content teaching the number of times less than the original pseudo-continuous variation number for which stop display is to be performed, or an equivalent number,
When the special variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern selection means, the execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution means is performed each time before the number of teachings taught in the pseudo continuous variation frequency appearance effect. By adjusting the relative relationship between the time required before the pseudo change display and stop display and the time required after the pseudo change display and stop display performed each time after the teaching count, Quasi-continuous variation time setting means for setting a total required time required to complete the pseudo variation display and stop display for the number of times shorter than a time using the subsequent required time for the teaching number of times. A gaming machine characterized by that. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the lottery element is newly stored by the lottery element storage means, the lottery result destination for determining in advance at least the result of the internal lottery using the new lottery element before the predetermined execution condition is satisfied A determination means;
When the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the new lottery element is determined in advance by the lottery result destination determining unit, any variation from among the plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining unit Fluctuation pattern destination determination means for determining in advance whether a pattern is selected;
Using a specific period until the newly stored lottery element is consumed by the internal lottery execution means, a hold display effect is executed that indicates that the newly stored lottery element is stored. Holding display effect execution means to perform,
A special lottery element is newly stored by the storage means, and it is determined that the special variation pattern is selected based on a previous determination result by the variation pattern destination determination means for the newly stored special lottery element. In the case, the special hold display of the content having relevance with the content of the schedule scheduled to be executed by the pseudo-continuous variation number appearance effect executing means within the specific period in which the hold display is being executed by the hold display effect executing means. Special hold display production execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the production;
When the special hold display effect execution determining means decides to execute the special hold display effect, the special hold display effect execution is performed so that the hold display effect executing means executes the special hold display effect as the hold display effect. A gaming machine, further comprising a control means. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
When the special hold display effect is executed by the hold display effect executing means, a specific period start time effect determining means for determining whether to execute the special hold display effect from the start time within the specific period;
If it is determined that the special hold display effect is not executed from the start by the specified period start effect determining means, the effect scheduled to be executed by the pseudo-continuous variation number appearing effect executing means at the start of the specified period The special hold display effect as the hold display effect is a special hold display effect of content that is not related to the content or content taught less than the number of times taught by the effect executed by the pseudo-continuous variation number appearance effect executing means. Special holding display effect execution control means for performing control to be executed by the effect execution means,
The special hold display effect execution control means,
When it is determined that the special hold display effect is to be executed from the start by the specific period start time effect determining means, the special hold display effect executing means is caused to execute the special hold display effect from the start within the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by performing control. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
When the special hold display effect execution control means performs control to execute the special hold display effect, when the predetermined trigger occurs, the specific period during which the hold display effect is being executed by the hold display effect execution means A special hold display effect change determining means for determining at least once whether or not to change from the special hold display effect to the special hold display effect.
When the special hold display effect changing means determines to change to the special hold display effect, the special hold display effect executing means changes the effect to change to the special hold display effect at a predetermined time within the specific period. A gaming machine further comprising special hold display effect change control means for performing control to be executed. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
When the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means satisfies a predetermined reach generation condition, reach effect execution means for executing a reach effect during execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution means;
The teaching taught by the pseudo-continuous variation count appearance effect from the start of the pseudo-continuous variation count appearance effect by the pseudo-continuous variation count appearance executing unit until the reach effect is started by the reach effect executing unit. Execute the pseudo continuous variation count display effect to execute the pseudo continuous variation count display effect of the content teaching the pseudo variation display and stop display times executed by the symbol effect execution means. And a gaming machine.